Amx 4

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46–017207
Revision 11
AMX-4 Series Diagnostics
Copyright 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1997, 1998, 1999 By General Electric Co.
Advanced Service Documentation

Property of GE
For GE Service Personnel Only
No Rights Licensed Ċ Do Not Use or Copy
Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 DIRECTION 46-017207
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
i
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 Diagnostics Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 Diagnostics Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-4 Sys Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-5 Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-6 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-7 Charge Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
2 ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 Entering Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2Ć1Ć1 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2Ć1Ć2 Exit Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3Ć1Ć1 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3Ć2Ć1 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-6 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3Ć6Ć2 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3Ć6Ć3 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1,
OR 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 4–1
4-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4Ć1Ć1 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4Ć2Ć1 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4Ć6Ć2 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4Ć6Ć3 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
SECTION TITLE PAGE
5 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 Selected Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-3 Charger and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5-4 On–Board Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-5 A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-6 Operator I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-7 Generator and AEC Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5-8 Generator Control 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5-9 Charger and Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5-10 AEC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5-11 Generator Control 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5-12 A/D Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-13 Set Back–Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-14 On–Board Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-15 Right Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-16 Left Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-17 Charge Current DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-18 Leakage Current Compensation DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-19 Programmable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-20 Filament Current Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-21 KVP Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-22 Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-23 Variables Unique To PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1
and 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-24 kVp/mAs Display After Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5-25 Critical Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5-26 Force the Use of 137 kV in Tapcal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5-27 Force an Extended Charge Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
6 DATA LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 Enter Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6Ć2Ć1 Enter View Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6Ć2Ć2 Enter Initialize Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 Load Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
7 ERROR LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 Entering Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7Ć2Ć1 View Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7Ć2Ć2 Initialize Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 View Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7-4 Initialize Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7-5 Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
iv
SECTION TITLE PAGE
8 CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8-2 Entering Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
9 DATA BASE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

9-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9-2 Entering Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9Ć2Ć1 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9Ć2Ć2 Exit Without Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-3 Data Base Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9-4 Selecting Data Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9-5 Changing Data Base Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9-6 Check Sum and Limit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9Ć7Ć1 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9Ć7Ć2 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9Ć7Ć3 Test Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9Ć7Ć4 Enter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9Ć7Ć5 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9Ć7Ć6 Test Change Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9Ć7Ć7 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9Ć7Ć8 On Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9Ć7Ć9 Return The Original Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-8 Floor Scuffing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
10 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10-2 Auto Cal Filament Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
10-3 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
10-4 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7
10-5 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–8
10-6 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–9
10-7 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12
10-8 Battery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
10-9 Field Light Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–18
v
SECTION TITLE PAGE
11 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1,
OR 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 11–1
11-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–1
11-2 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–5
11-3 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–6
11-4 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–7
11-5 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–8
11-6 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–11
11-7 Battery Parameters for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1
or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–15
11-8 Battery Parameters for PROMS
46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–16
11-9 Field Light Parameters for PROMS
46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . 11–18
46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–19
11-11 Auto Cal Filament Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–20
11-12 Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS 46–303815G1/
46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–21
11-13 Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS 46–329187G1 or G2/
46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–22
12 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1

12-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
12-2 Applications Error Handling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
12-3 Circular Error Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
12-4 Histogram Of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
13 THEORY 13–1
13-1 Power–up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1
13-2 Visual Indication Of Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1
13-3 Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1
13-4 80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test – 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
13-5 EPROM Checksum Test (test – 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
13-6 Ram Battery Test (test – 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
13-7 External Ram Test (test – 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
13-8 Calibration Data Checksum Test (test – 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
13Ć8Ć1 Checksum By-pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-9 Watchdog Timer Test (test – 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
13-10 Programmable Interval Timer Test (test – 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
13-11 A/D Converter Circuitry Test (test – 07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
13-12 Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
13-13 Charge Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–5
13Ć13Ć1 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-302688G1/46-302687G1,
46-303272G1/46-303273G1 and 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13Ć13Ć2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13Ć13Ć3 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS
46-329187G1 or G2/46-329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
vi
SECTION TITLE PAGE

13-14 Battery Charge Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–15
13Ć14Ć1 Battery Charger Run-Time Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13Ć14Ć2 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46-316685G1/
46-316686G1 and Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13-15 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–15
13Ć15Ć1 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13Ć15Ć2 Drive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13Ć15Ć3 Drive Control Software Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13-16 Generator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–21
13Ć16Ć1 Generator Control Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13Ć16Ć2 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13Ć16Ć3 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13Ć16Ć4 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13Ć16Ć5 Auto Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13Ć16Ć6 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13-17 Field Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–22
13-18 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 . . . . . . . 13–23
13-19 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
or 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–24
13-20 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . 13–25
13-21 Battery Aging for Firmware 46–316685G1/46–316686G1
and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–26
13-22 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2
(SMART GAUGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–26
13Ć22Ć1 Discharge Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13Ć22Ć2 Emergency Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
13Ć22Ć3 Recharge Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
13Ć22Ć4 Voltage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13Ć22Ć5 Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13Ć22Ć6 Battery Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13-23 Heat Storage Tube Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33
13-24 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33
13-25 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33
13Ć25Ć1 Drive Handle Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
13Ć25Ć2 Battery Charger Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
13Ć25Ć3 Battery Voltmeter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13Ć25Ć4 Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13Ć25Ć5 mAs Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13Ć25Ć6 kVp Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13Ć25Ć7 Tap Relay Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13Ć25Ć8 Filament Current (X-ray Tube Characteristics) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13Ć25Ć9 Field Light On Time Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13-26 Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36
13-27 Data Log Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36
13-28 Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36
vii
SECTION TITLE PAGE
14 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–1

14-1 Isolating Battery Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–1
14Ć1Ć1 Voltage Drop Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14-2 CPU Dip Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–2
14-3 Generator Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–3
14Ć3Ć1 Tube Spits During CALIBRATE TAPS" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14Ć3Ć2 X-ray Word Limit During CAL FIL CUR TBL" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14Ć3Ć3 Triggering - The Oscilloscope Prior to CALIBRATE kVp" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14-4 Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to Capacity Displayed
(Firmware 46–329187G1 or G2 and 46–329188G1 or G2 Only) . . . . . 14–4
15 BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–1

15-1 Illustration Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–1
APPENDIX DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
viii
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 Feb. 15, 1988 Initial release.
1 May 20, 1988 Complete diagnostics.
2 Sept. 15, 1989 Extensive programming changes.
3 Jan. 1, 1990 New PROMS, programming changes.
4 Jan. 25, 1991 New PROMS, extensive programming changes. Add new separate sections for
new PROMS for System Diagnostics and for Data Base.
5 Feb. 26, 1993 Add new PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1. Add Model Numbers
46-315161 Series. Deleted references to obsolete PROMS
46-279026G9/46-279150G8 and to Charger Board 46-232842G1 which are no
longer in the field. Add Section 13-15-3, Drive Control Software Theory",
and add Left & Right Drive Functional Flow" diagram to Section 15.
6 Dec. 17, 1993 Add PROMS 46-329187G1/46-329188G1. Add Model 46-329267 Series.
Add Charger Board 46-288786G1.
7 Feb. 17, 1997 Corrected Monitor Full Capacity millivolts algoritm in Section 11.
8 Mar. 10, 1997 Changed name to AMX-4 Series Diagnostics;" added 2115090 and 2169360
models to effectivity (Section 1-1).
9 July 14, 1997 Updated Sections 5-24 and 5-26.
10 Apr. 12, 1999 Updated Sections 4-5, 4-6-2, 4-6-3, 7-3, 9-7-1, 9-7-2, 9-7-5, 9-7-7.
Added references to firmware 46-329187G2 and 46-329188G2 for Orion x-
ray tube.
10 Apr. 28, 2003 Updated format for Avantx e-tools project.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title Page 11 5-1 thru 5-16 11 11-1 thru 11-22 11

i thru xiv 11 6-1 thru 6-4 11 12-1 thru 12-20 11
1-1 thru 1-6 11 7-1 thru 7-8 11 13-1 thru 13-36 11
2-1 thru 2-4 11 8-1 and 8-2 11 14-1 thru 14-4 11
3-1 thru 3-12 11 9-1 thru 9-8 11 15-1 thru 15-24 11
4-1 thru 4-12 11 10-1 thru 10-18 11 A-1 and A-2 11
ix
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
x
Direction 46–017207
Revision 11
AMX–4 Series Diagnostics
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly complete protection. Nor can any on Radiation Protection, and take
used may cause injury. practical design compel the adequate steps to protect against
Accordingly, the instructions operator to take adequate injury.
herein contained should be precautions to prevent the
thoroughly read and understood possibility of any persons carelessly The equipment is sold with the
by everyone who will use the exposing themselves or others to understanding that the General
equipment before you attempt to radiation. Electric Company, Medical Systems
place this equipment in Group, its agents, and
operation. The General Electric It is important that everyone having representatives have no
Company, Medical Systems anything to do with x-radiation be responsibility for injury or damage
Group, will be glad to assist and properly trained and fully acquainted which may result from improper use
cooperate in placing this with the recommendations of the of the equipment.
equipment in use. National Council on Radiation Various protective material and
Protection and Measurements as devices are available. It is urged that
Although this apparatus published in NCRP Reports such materials or devices be used.
incorporates a high degree of available from NCRP Publications,
protection against x-radiation other 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room CAUTION: United States Federal
than the useful beam, no practical 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, law restricts this device to use by or
design of equipment can provide and of the International Commission on the order of a physician.
xi
xii
If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document,
please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to:
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS

MANAGER – INFORMATION INTEGRATION,
AMERICAS W–622
P.O. BOX 414
MILWAUKEE, WI 53201–0414
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are shall be performed by qualified GE requirements of the applicable
preliminary to positioning of the Medical personnel. The products electrical codes.
equipment at the site prepared for the involved (and the accompanying
equipment shall be performed by electrical installations) are highly
licensed electrical contractors. In sophisticated, and special The purchaser of GE equipment shall
addition, electrical feeds into the engineering competence is required. only utilize qualified personnel (i.e.,
Power Distribution Unit shall be In performing all electrical work on GE’s field engineers, personnel of
performed by licensed electrical these products, GE will use its own third-party service companies with
contractors. Other connections specially trained field engineers. All of equivalent training, or licensed
between pieces of electrical GE’s electrical work on these electricians) to perform electrical
equipment, calibrations, and testing products will comply with the servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely upon discovery, or in any event, 8*285–3449 immediately after
examined at time of delivery. If within 14 days after receipt, and the damage is found. At this time be
damage is apparent, have notation contents and containers held for ready to supply name of carrier,
“damage in shipment” written on inspection by the carrier. A delivery date, consignee name,
all copies of the freight or express transportation company will not pay freight or express bill number, item
bill before delivery is accepted or a claim for damage if an inspection damaged and extent of damage.
“signed for” by a General Electric is not requested within this 14 day
representative or a hospital period. Complete instructions regarding
receiving agent. Whether noted or claim procedure are found in
concealed, damage MUST be Call Traffic and Transportation, Section “S” of the Policy &
reported to the carrier immediately Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94
xiii
xiv
DIAGNOSTICS
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
AMX–4 IDENTIFICATION
RATING
PLATE
1-1 General
See Illustration 1–1. The AMX–4 Series (henceforth, in this publication, called AMX–4) is
identified on the rating plate located on the top cover by Model Numbers 46–270157Gx,
46–315161Gx, 46–329267Gx, 2115090–x, 2169360–x, 2236420–x and any other model
number associated with the AMX–4 Series mobile x–ray equipment.
This book is not intended to be read from cover to cover like a novel. It is intended to intro-
duce you to the AMX–4 Diagnostics Service Tools and provide reference material to help
you isolate problems.
You should be familiar with the operation and capabilities of Diagnostics before you need
them. This book can help you with the process. Read Section 1 Introduction. It provides a
brief overview of the diagnostics. Read Section 3-5 Loop Test or Section 4-5 Loop Test, as
appropriate for the PROMS in this unit, and Section 9 Data Base Access. You will learn how
to operate AMX–4 Diagnostics and gain some insight into it’s capabilities by performing
the Demonstration Procedures.
You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents
when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the conver-
sions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when needed. Appendix 1 will
help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are unable to use
your calculator.
1-1
The AMX–4 contains operating safeguards providing maximum safety. Before servicing,
be certain proper operating procedures are being used. Refer to Direction 46–017291
AMX–4 Operation for Model Numbers 46–270157G1, G2, G3, and G50. For Model
Numbers 270157G4 and G5, refer to Direction 46–017334, AMX–4 (Japanese) Operation.
For Model Numbers 46–315161 and 46–329267 Series, refer to Direction 46–017531,
AMX–4 International Operation Manual (46–315161 & 46–329267 Series). For model
numbers 2169360–x and 2236420–x, refer to Direction 2166913–100, AMX–4+ Operation
Manual, and to Direction 2166911–100, AMX–4+ International Operation Manual.
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
PROM LOCATIONS ON CPU BOARDS
CALIBRATION
PROM
DIAGNOSTICS
& APPLICATION
PROM
U51
U6
U104
U36
CPU BOARD 46-232828 CPU BOARD 46-264974
1-2 Diagnostics Identification
Diagnostics are compatible with AMX–4 Model Numbers 46–270157, 46–315161,

46–329267, 2169360–x and 2236420–x Series. The PROM locations and identification
numbers are shown in Illustration 1–2, PROM Locations On CPU Boards, and listed in
Table 1–1, CPU Boards, Proms And Locations.
TABLE 1–1
CPU BOARDS, PROMS AND LOCATIONS
CPU BOARD 46-232828 46-264974

PROMS Diagnostics/Application 46-302688G1 U36 REV 0 46-302688G1 U104 REV 0
Calibration 46-302687G1 U6 REV 0 46-302687G1 U51 REV 0
PROMS Diagnostics/Application 46-303272G1 U36 REV 0 46-303272G1 U104 REV 0
Calibration 46-303273G1 U6 REV 0 46-303273G1 U51 REV 0
PROMS Diagnostics/Application 46-303815G1 U104 REV 0
NOT APPLICABLE
Calibration 46-303816G1 U51 REV 0
NOT APPLICABLE
NOT APPLICABLE
NOT APPLICABLE
1-2
TABLE 1–2
RELATED FMI’S
PROMS RELATED FMI’S
46–302688G1/46–302687G1 FMI 10271
46–303272G1/46–303273G1 FMI’S 10289 & 10291
46-303815G1/46-303816G1 N/A
46-316685G1/46-316686G1 FMI'S 10545 & 10546
46-329187G1/46-329188G1 N/A
46-329187G2/46-329188G2 N/A
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM
STRUCTURE
DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM
END SERVC MODE DIAGNOSIS ITEMS
PASSWORD
REQUIRED
SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGE BATTERYS
1-3 Diagnostics Menu Items
The Diagnostics program bypasses the applications program and operator console control
functions, providing control for fault isolation. Illustration 1–3 is a diagram of the Diagnos-
tics program structure.
The Diagnostics Menu has four choices:
1. SYS DIAGNOSTICS Software routines to aid fault isolation.
2. DATA LOG Loading, viewing and initializing of the Data

Log
1-3
3. ERROR LOG Viewing and initializing of the error log and

error histogram files.
4. CHARGE BATTERYS Charge batteries when the AMX is not fully

calibrated. Voltmeter and Charger must be
calibrated.
ILLUSTRATION 1–4
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
STRUCTURE
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
SYS BLOCK TEST DISP CNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
OP SWITCH TEST DISP BATRY VOLTS
1-4 Sys Diagnostics
As shown on Illustration 1–4, Diagnostics has the following menu items:
1. SYS BLOCK TEST Checks selected blocks of circuitry.
2. OP SWITCH TEST Displays the name of an operator accessible

switch or switches that are closed.
3. DISP CNTRL TEST Exercises display controller to make sure all

characters display correctly.
4. DSP BATRY VOLTS Displays battery voltage.
5. LOOP TEST Continuously reads and writes to a specified

address.
1-4
ILLUSTRATION 1–5
DATA LOG FUNCTIONS
DATA LOG
VIEW DATA LOG INIT DATA LOG LOAD DATA LOG
1-5 Data Log
As shown on Illustration 1–5, there are three Data Log functions:
1. View View Data Log information.
2. Initialize Sets all Data Log information to zero.
3. Load Data log Put information into specific Data Log eleĆ
ments.
1-5
ILLUSTRATION 1–6
ERROR LOG FUNCTIONS
ERROR LOG
HISTOGRAMS ERROR LIST
1-6 Error Log
As shown on Illustration 1–6, there are two Error Log functions:
1. Histograms View and initialize the Histograms.
2. Error List View and initialize the Error List.
1-7 Charge Batteries
Charge Batteries does not have additional menu selections.
Follow the displayed prompts.
1-6
SECTION 2
ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS
ILLUSTRATION 2–1
SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION
KEY SWITCH
É
É
SERVICE
SWITCH
IN LEFT
SIDE
2-1 Entering Diagnostics
Before using Diagnostics you must start the diagnostic program. To start the diagnostic pro-
gram, perform the following steps:
1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 2-1 up to the application position.
2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods.
If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position.
If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for more than
two seconds, then back ON again.
If power is on and the top cover is removed, providing access to the processor
board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board
46–264974 or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46–232828).
3. While Power Up tests are running, set the service switch down to the service
position.
When the diagnostic program is ready the END SERVCăMODE menu selection appears
on the Message Display.
2-1
ILLUSTRATION 2–2
DIAGNOSTIC MENU SELECTION
DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
PASSWORD
mAs kVp kVp REQUIRED
ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT
SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGER
After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DIAGNOSIS
ITEMS menu selection.
Illustration 2–2 shows diagnostics selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DIĆ
AGNOSIS ITEMS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that
Data Base Access may be entered.
2-1-1 Entering Password
Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After entering
the password, the prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS indicating that Diagnostics has
been entered.
When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed
by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS. Press mAs to re–enter Diag-
nostics.
If the password is not available, press mAsĂ until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears.
The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the
key switch off.
2-2
2-1-2 Exit Diagnostics
To exit DIAGNOSIS ITEMS press mAsĂ when one of the menu selections shown on
Illustration 2–2 displays.
The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS indicating

that Diagnostics is not active. Return to the applications program by performing the follow-
ing steps:
1. Press either kVp or kVp . The END SERVICE MODE menu selection
displays.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN.
3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE
KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for more than two seconds, then back
ON again.
4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.
2-3
2-4
SECTION 3
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:
PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR
46–303272G1/46–303273G1
AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974
System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and
check blocks of circuitry.
ILLUSTRATION 3–1
SYSTEM BLOCK TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TESTS DISP CNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
3-1 System Block Test
System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also
checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U332 on CPU
46–232828 or U355 on CPU 46–264974 is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to
the Filament and kVp Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Con-
trol Board at J2 pins 11 and 12, schematic location 2–D1. The signal leaves this board unal-
tered as KVP DMN FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2–E4, and returns to the
CPU Board on connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5–E1. Analog buffer AR398
on CPU 46–232828 or AR392 on CPU 46–264974 conditions the signal for multiplexer
U406 on CPU 46–232828 or U342 on CPU 46–264974. The signal is ultimately read by the
processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test passes.
3-1
Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP5* signals at the Generator
Control 2 Port, schematic location 4–B9 on CPU board. The six tap signals go to six identi-
cal circuits on the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these
signals are converted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1
FDBK through TAP5 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port,
schematic location 3–E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the
test passes.
By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil will produce a feed-
back signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should hear six (see
note) equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If you
don’t, and the test passes, check the relays.
Note that with this firmware, TAP6* is not tested.
3-1-1 Running System Block Test
Illustration 3–1 shows Block Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS
BLOCK TESTS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST,
then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test
fails FAIL appears after the prompt.
When Tap Test runs, you should hear six equally spaced clicks of the relays being
selected.
3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs until the display goes
blank and the test stops. Release mAs . The test makes one last check, then
the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection
may be made from the Diagnostics menu.
3-2
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
SWITCH TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TESTS DSP CNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
OP SWITCH TEST DSP BATRY VOLTS
3-2 Op Switch Test
Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on
the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH
PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Fol-
lowing is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations:
EXPOSE EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from

HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1.
PREP PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from
FIELD LIGHT FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator
connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8
pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes
through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2, sheet 2.
DRIVE ENABLE DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and
28 sheet 3 location D-1.
TUBE PARKED TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins
13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1
RUN SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on
sheet 4 location H-6.
HIGH TUBE PRESS X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins
6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through RoĆ
tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.
BUMPER BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1
A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1.
CHARGING CORD LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1.
KVP-UP KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display
Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2
3-3
KVP-DWN KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on

Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2
MAS-DWN MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on DisĆ
play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2
MAS-UP MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display
3-2-1 Running Op Switch Test
Illustration 3–2 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP
SWITCH TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that
the test is running.
If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display.
3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs . The prompt may not display mAs
when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another seĆ
lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is funcĆ
tioning correctly.
3-4
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
3-3 Display Controller
This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that seg-
ments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights. This is a visual
test.
Illustration 3–3 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and
mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to
select DISP CNTRL TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The test starts to run.
3. Press and hold mAs . When all displays are blank, release the switch. The
prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be
made from the Diagnostics menu.
3-5
ILLUSTRATION 3–4
BATTERY VOLTAGE
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TEST DISPCNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
3-4 Battery Voltage
Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of remov-
ing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage
within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltme-
ter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage differ-
ence is more than 0.2 volts.
Illustration 3–4 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select
DISP BATRY VOLTS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage
appears on the kVp and mAs Display.
Each time you press mAs , the battery voltage is sampled and displayed.
3. Press either kVp or kVp to make your next selection from the DiagnosĆ
tics Menu.
Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other func-
tion.
3-6
ILLUSTRATION 3–5
LOOP TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TEST DISP CHTRL TEST LOOP TEST
DEFINE ADDRESS
–WRITE– –READ–
DATA
3-5 Loop Test
Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected
address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running.
Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus loca-
tion can be accessed with this test.
Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check
CAUTION Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop
Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 5 will prevent this problem.
Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics.
Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You
may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a
potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify
the fault.
Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the
system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the
Service Switch up and down will also reset the latches.)
3-7
Illustration 3–5 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select
LOOP TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message DisĆ
play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enterĆ
ing an address, press mAs .
The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST.
ILLUSTRATION 3–6
HEXADECIMAL
REPRESENTATION
Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal
character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between
hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 3–6. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6.
Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAsă is
pressed to enter the selection, or when mAsă is pressed to change the last value.
3. Change address by first pressing mAsă, then pressing kVp or kVp to

select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press
mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes
to -READ- when the last value is changed.
4. Using either kVp or kVp , select -READ- to read the address or
-WRITE- to write to the address.
5. Press mAsă at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOPĆ
ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data
will change if the bit pattern on the port changes.
6. Press mAsă at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA.
Change data by first pressing mAs two times, then pressing kVp or kVp
to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press
mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes
to LOOPING--- when the last value is changed. The address and data apĆ
pear on the kVp and mAs display.
7. End the test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicatĆ
ing that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.
3-8
ILLUSTRATION 3–7
LOOP TEST DISPLAY
Address Data
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËË
Prompts
and
Increase Errors
Value mAs UP
Exit
kVp UP
mAs
DOWN
Enter Value
kVp or
DOWN
Shift Data Entry
Decrease
Value
3-6 Demonstration Procedure

During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test
continually addresses a port.
3-6-1 Enter Loop Test
Illustrations 3–5 and 3–7 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection
path.
See Illustration 3–7. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data
appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a
Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps:
1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posiĆ
tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service
switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the
display changes to END SERVC MODE.
2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp .
3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSĆ
WORD--.
4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS.
5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to SYS
BLOCK TEST.
6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp . The
prompt changes to LOOP TEST.
7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to DEFINE ADĆ
DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You
are now ready to use Loop Test.
3-9
ILLUSTRATION 3–8
READ PORT DISPLAY
1000 Data
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËË Prompts
ËËË
and
Increase Errors
Value mAs UP
Exit
kVp UP
mAs Enter Value
kVp DOWN
Decrease DOWN or
Value Shift Data Entry
3-6-2 Read a Port
You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by
Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status
for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being
read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the
following steps:
1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test.

2. Press kVp and kVp . You haven't selected a character so nothing happens.
3. Select the first character by pressing mAs .
4. Press kVp and kVp to see how the first address character changes, then
change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration
3-8.
5. Select the second character by pressing mAsă. Press kVp and kVp to see
how the second address character changes then change it to 0.
6. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAsă
three times. The prompt changes to -READ-.
7. Press kVp and kVp . The prompt changes between -READ- and
-WRITE-. Select -READ- and press mAsă. The prompt changes to
-LOOPING-. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs Display.
Data may indicate that the Left Stall or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal because
the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board.
8. Press the Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes
when any of the switches close. By pressing the switches you should be able to
satisfy your self that the port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value disĆ
played.
3-10
3-6-3 Write Then Read
You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex.
By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are
active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status
for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap re-
lays.
Select Port 1000 Hex.
1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3-6-1 Enter Loop Test.

2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAsă.
3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp or kVp .
three times. The prompt changes to -READ-.
Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3.
5. Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp or kVpă.

6. Select the first character by pressing mAsă two times.
7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp or kVp , then press mAsă
to select the second character.
8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAsă. The
relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays.
9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. ReĆ
lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset.
Re–enter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex.
10. Enter Loop Test.

11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp ,
kVp , and mAsă.
12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAsă.
Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex.
Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. You will hear the
relays drop out when the data is written to the port.
3-11
3-12
SECTION 4
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:
PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/
46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR
46–329187G2/46–329188G2
AND CPU BOARD 46–264974
System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and
check blocks of circuitry.
ILLUSTRATION 4–1
SYSTEM BLOCK TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TESTS DISP CNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
4-1 System Block Test
System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also
checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U355 on
CPU 46–264974, is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to the Filament and kVp
Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Control Board at J2 pins 11
and 12, schematic location 2–D1. The signal leaves this board unaltered as KVP DMN
FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2–E4, and returns to the CPU Board on
connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5–E1. Analog buffer AR392 on CPU
46–264974 conditions the signal for multiplex U342 on CPU 46–264974. The signal is ulti-
mately read by the processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test
passes.
4-1
Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP6* signals at the Generator
Control 2 Port, schematic location 4–B9. The six tap signals go to six identical circuits on
the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these signals are con-
verted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1 FDBK through
TAP6 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port, schematic location
3–E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the test passes.
By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil or stuck contacts will
produce a feedback signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should
hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If
you don’t, and the test passes, check the relays.
4-1-1 Running System Block Test
Illustration 4–1 shows Block Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS
BLOCK TESTS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST,
then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test
fails FAIL appears after the prompt.
When Tap Test runs, you should hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays
being selected.
3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs until the display goes
blank and the test stops. Release mAs . The test makes one last check, then
the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection
may be made from the Diagnostics menu.
4-2
ILLUSTRATION 4–2
SWITCH TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
4-2 Op Switch Test
Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on
the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH
PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Fol-
lowing is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations:
EXPOSE EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from

PREP PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from
FIELD LIGHT FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator
connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8
pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes
through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.
DRIVE ENABLE DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and
28 sheet 3 location D-1.
TUBE PARKED TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins
13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1
RUN SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on
sheet 4 location H-6.
HIGH TUBE PRESS X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins
6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through RoĆ
tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.
BUMPER BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1
A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1.
CHARGING CORD LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1.
KVP-UP KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display
4-3
KVP-DWN KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on

Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2
MAS-DWN MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on DisĆ
play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2
MAS-UP MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display
4-2-1 Running Op Switch Test
Illustration 4–2 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP
SWITCH TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that
the test is running.
If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display.
3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs . The prompt may not display mAs
when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another seĆ
lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is funcĆ
tioning correctly.
4-4
ILLUSTRATION 4–3
DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
4-3 Display Controller
This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that seg-
ments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights.
Illustration 4–3 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and
mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to
select DISP CNTRL TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The test starts to run.
3. Press and hold mAs . When all displays are blank, release the switch. The
prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be
made from the Diagnostics menu.
4-5
ILLUSTRATION 4–4
BATTERY VOLTAGE
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TEST DISPCNTRL TEST LOOP TEST
4-4 Battery Voltage
Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of remov-
ing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage
within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltme-
ter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage differ-
ence is more than 0.2 volts.
Illustration 4–4 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
DISP BATRY VOLTS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage
appears on the kVp and mAs Display.
Each time you press mAs , the battery voltage is sampled and displayed.
3. Press either kVp or kVp to make your next selection from the DiagnosĆ
tics Menu.
Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other func-
tion.
4-6
ILLUSTRATION 4–5
LOOP TEST
SYS DIAGNOSTICS
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS BLOCK TEST DISP CHTRL TEST LOOP TEST
DEFINE ADDRESS
SELECT
HEXADECIMAL OR BINARY FOR-
MAT
–WRITE– –READ–
DATA
4-5 Loop Test
Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected
address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running.
Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus loca-
tion can be accessed with this test.
Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check
CAUTION Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop
Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 4 will prevent this problem.
Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics.
Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You
may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a
potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify
the fault.
Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the
system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the
Service Switch up, and then down will also reset the latches.)
4-7
Illustration 4–5 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select
LOOP TEST.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message DisĆ
play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enterĆ
ing an address, press mAs twice.
The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST.
ILLUSTRATION 4–6
HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION
Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal
character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between
hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 4–6. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6.
Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAsă is
pressed to enter the selection, or when mAsă is pressed to change the last value.
3. Change address by first pressing mAsă, then pressing kVp or kVp to
select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press
mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. Note that the digit
being changed will flash.
4. The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alternate on the
display. Pressing MAS will display in hexadecimal format. Pressing MAS
will display data in a binary format.
5. The prompt changes to -READ-. Using either kVp or kVp , select
-READ- to read the address or -WRITE- to write to the address.
6. Press mAsă at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOPĆ
ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data
will change if the bit pattern on the port changes. Only data will appear if
binary format is selected.
7. Press mAsă at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA.
Change data by first pressing mAs two times, then pressing kVp or kVp
to select the proper hexadecimal or binary value. After the required value disĆ
plays, press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The digit
will flash. The prompt changes to LOOPING--- when the last value is
changed. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Only
data will appear if binary format is selected.
8. End the test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicating
that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.
4-8
ILLUSTRATION 4–7
LOOP TEST DISPLAY
Binary Mode or Hexadecimal Mode
Data Address and Data
kVp AND mAs

DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËË
Prompts
and
Increase Errors
Value mAs UP
Exit
kVp UP
mAs
DOWN
Enter Value
kVp or
DOWN
Shift Data Entry
Decrease
Value

During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test
continually addresses a port.
4-6-1 Enter Loop Test
Illustrations 4–5 and 4–7 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection
path.
See Illustration 4–7. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data
appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a
Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps:
1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posiĆ
tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service
switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the
display changes to END SERVC MODE.
2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp .
3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSĆ
WORD--.
4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS.
5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to SYS
BLOCK TEST.
6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp . The
prompt changes to LOOP TEST.
7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to DEFINE ADĆ
DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You
are now ready to use Loop Test.
4-9
ILLUSTRATION 4–8
READ PORT DISPLAY
1000 Data
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËË Prompts
ËËË
and
Increase Errors
Value mAs UP
Exit
kVp UP
mAs
DOWN
Enter Value
Decrease kVp or
Value DOWN Shift Data Entry
4-6-2 Read a Port

You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by
Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status
for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being
read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the
following steps:
2. Press kVp and kVp . You haven't selected a character so nothing happens.
3. Select the first character by pressing mAs .
4. Press kVp and kVp to see how the first address character changes, then
change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration
4-8. The digit being changed will flash.
5. Select the second character by pressing mAsă. Press kVp and kVp to see
how the second address character changes then change it to 0.
three times. The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alterĆ
nate on the display. Pressing MAS will display in hexadecimal format. PressĆ
ing MAS will display data in a binary format.
7. The prompt changes to -READ-. Press kVp and kVp . The prompt
changes between -READ- and -WRITE-. Select -READ- and press
mAsă. The prompt changes to -LOOPING-. The address and data appear
on the kVp and mAs Display.
Data may indicate that the Left Stall and/or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal
because the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board.
8. Press Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes
when any of switches close. By pressing switches you should be able to satisfy
your self that port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value displayed.
4-10
4-6-3 Write Then Read
You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex.
By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are
active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status
for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap re-
lays.
Select Port 1000 Hex.

2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAsă.
3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp or kVp .
three times. Press mAs for Hexadecimal. Press mAs for Binary. The
prompt changes to -READ-.
Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3.
5. Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp or kVpă.

6. Select the first character by pressing mAsă two times.
7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp or kVp , then press mAsă
to select the second character.
8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAsă. The
relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays.
9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. ReĆ
lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset.
Re–enter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex.
10. Enter Loop Test.

11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp ,
kVp , and mAsă.
12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAsă.
Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex.
Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. (Setting the Ser-
vice Switch up and down will also reset the Generator Control Port) You will hear the relays
drop out when the data is written to the port.
4-11
4-12
SECTION 5
I/O PORTS
5-1 Introduction
This section contains listings of CPU Port addresses, signal names, and schematic loca-
tions. Using Loop Test, you can read from and write to these ports.
Tables 5–1 and 5–2 cross reference the read and write port select signals with the hex ad-
dress, port name, and section where signal descriptions are located. These signals originate
at U78 on CPU 46–232828 or U170 on CPU 46–264974 and U139 on CPU 46–232828 or
U24 on CPU 46–264974. Signal names appear along the right edge of CPU Schematic page
two.
TABLE 5–1
READ PORTS
Signal Address Port

Name Hex Name Section
RDP0* 1000 Charger and Drive Status 5–3

RDP1* 1100 On Board Status 5–4
RDP2* 1200 A/D Converter 5–5
RDP3* 1300 Not Used
RDP4* 1400 Operator I/O Status 5–6
RDP5* 1500 Programmable Timer Not Described
RDP6* 1600 Generator and AEC Status 5–7
TABLE 5–2
WRITE PORTS
Signal Address Port

Name Hex Name Section
WRP0* 1000 Generator Control 2 5–8

WRP1* 1080 Not Used
WRP2* 1100 Charger and Drive Control 5–9
WRP3* 1180 AEC Control 5–10
WRP4* 1200 Generator Control 1 5–11
WRP5* 1280 A/D Control 5–12
WRP6* 1300 Set Backup Time 5–13
WRP7* 1380 On Board Control 5–14
WRP8* 1400 Right Speed Command DAC 5–15
1401 Left Speed Command DAC 5–16
WRP9* 1480 Charge Current DAC 5–17
1481 Leakage Compensation DAC 5–18
WRP10* 1500 Programmable Timer 5–19
WRP11* 1580 Filament Current Demand DAC 5–20
1584 kVp Demand DAC 5–21
WRP12* 1600 Watchdog Timer 5–22
WRP13* 1680 Not Used
5-1
5-2 Selected Functions
This table lists selected functions with their address and data. You may activate these func-
tions by writing the data value to the address listed for the function. When finished, always
reset any port that you wrote to by writing 00 Hex to it, or resetting the CPU.
TABLE 5–3
SELECTED FUNCTIONS PORT
Address Data
Function Hex Value Hex Value
60 Hz Clocks 1200 01
Turns on 60 Hz clocks to 60 Hz
Inverter.
1k Hz Clocks 1200 02
Turns on 1k Hz clocks to the 1k Hz
Inverter.
2k Hz Clocks 1200 04
Turns on 2k Hz and 16k Hz clocks
to the 1k Hz Inverter.
Field Light 1200 11

Turns on the Collimator Field Light.
2k Hz Filament Inverter 1200 15

Turns on the 2k Hz filament inverter
at 4.5 Amps.
Turn the Rotor On

First enter 1000 02
Then enter 1200 11
Pull in Safety Contactor 1000 04

Press the PREP switch
Charge at 2.5 Amps

Plug in charging cord
First enter 1100 04
Then enter 1480 80
5-2
5-3 Charger and Drive Status
Read only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1–A to 1–D.
Port select signal is RDP0*.
TABLE 5–4
CHARGER AND DRIVE STATUS PORT
BIT SIGNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
0 LINE SENSE Logic 1 charger is plugged in to a live socket.
1 OPTION SW 3 Logic 1 selects English prompts.

Logic 0 selects French prompts.
2 OPTION SW 4 (Not used)
3 BUMPER Logic 1 bumper switch is engaged, something was hit.
4 TUBE PARKED SW Logic 1 x–ray tube arm is locked in place.

Logic 0 x–ray tube arm is not locked in place.
5 LEFT STALL Logic 1 left drive motor has overheated or stalled.
6 RIGHT STALL Logic 1 right drive motor has overheated or stalled.
7 DRIVE ENA SW Logic 1 drive enable bar is activated.
5-3
5-4 On–Board Status
Read only port with address location 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 7–F to 7–H.
TABLE 5–5
ON–BOARD STATUS PORT
0 BU TMR OKAY Logic 1 back–up exposure timer has not timed out
1 EXP CMND STATUS Indicates the status of the hardware synchronized

START EXP CMND signal
2 A/D STATUS Logic 1 conversion is in progress
3 XMIT OK Logic 1 sending data to the display without flicker

Logic 0 sending data to display causes flicker
Note that this bit toggles while displayed.
This is a normal condition.
4 DISPLAY OK Logic 1 display controller is scanning
5 BAUD RATE SW Logic 1 selects 375k Baud

Logic 0 selects 187.5k Baud
6 OPTION SW 1 ** Logic 1 enable +24, 15V tests

Logic 0 disable +24, 15V tests
7 SERVICE SW Logic 1service mode requested
** Do not select for CPU board 46–232828.
5-4
5-5 A/D Converter
Start 8-bit Conversion
Read only port with address location 1201 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from
this address with the READ A/D signal = “0”,starts an 8–bit conversion (data read in this
case is irrelevant).
Start 12-bit Conversion
this address with the READ A/D signal = “0”, starts a 12–bit conversion (data read in this
case is irrelevant).
Read A/D MSB
this address with the READ A/D signal = “1”, reads the 8 most significant bits of the A/D
output.
Read A/D LSB
this address with the READ A/D signal = “1”, reads the 4 least significant bits of the 12–bit
A/D output followed by the 4 trailing zeroes in the least significant nibble.
5-5
5-6 Operator I/O Status
Read only port with address location 1400 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1–D to 1–H.
TABLE 5–6
OPERATOR I/O STATUS PORT
0 SER PORT EN Logic 1 serial port is to be enabled
1 KEY SWITCH ON Logic 1 key switch is in the ON position.
2 OPTION SW 2 Logic 1 cycles CPU at Power–Up.

Logic 0 normal run mode.
3 FIELD LIGHT SW Logic 1 field light switch is pressed.
4 MAS UP Logic 1 MAS UP switch is pressed
5 MAS DOWN Logic 1 MAS DOWN switch is pressed
6 KVP UP Logic 1 KVP UP switch is pressed
7 KVP DOWN Logic 1 KVP DOWN switch is pressed.
5-6
5-7 Generator and AEC Status
Read only port with address location 1600 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5–D to 1–H.
Tap feedback signals originate on the 1 kHz driver board. Tap selection is through the Gen-
erator Control 2 port. Tap numbers and tap selection relay numbers are the same. Tap 6 and
relay K6 should not be active during applications. Port select signal is RDP6*.
TABLE 5–7
GENERATOR AND AEC STATUS PORT
0 TAP 1 FDBK Logic 1 tap 1 signal was received by the 1khz inverter
6 AEC ON Logic 1 when Automatic Exposure Control is selected.

Allows AEC EXP EN to terminate exposure.
7 AEC EXP EN Logic 1 exposure allowed when AEC ON is active.

Logic 0 exposure stops when AEC ON is active.
Logic 1 when AEC is not installed.
TABLE 5–8
KVP TAP SELECTION RELAY
HEX msb–K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 lsb–K1
5-7
00H 0 0 0 0 0 0
01H 0 0 0 0 0 1
02H 0 0 0 0 1 0
03H 0 0 0 0 1 1
04H 0 0 0 1 0 0
05H 0 0 0 1 0 1
06H 0 0 0 1 1 0
07H 0 0 0 1 1 1
08H 0 0 1 0 0 0
09H 0 0 1 0 0 1
0AH 0 0 1 0 1 0
0BH 0 0 1 0 1 1
0CH 0 0 1 1 0 0
0DH 0 0 1 1 0 1
0EH 0 0 1 1 1 0
0FH 0 0 1 1 1 1
10H 0 1 0 0 0 0
20H 1 0 0 0 0 0
30H 1 1 0 0 0 0
40H = AEC ON
80H = AEC EXP EN
C0H = AEC ON and AEC EXP EN
5-8
5-8 Generator Control 2
Write only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 9–B. Port se-
lect signal is WRP0*.
TABLE 5–9
GENERATOR CONTROL 2 PORT
0 TAP 6 Logic 1 selects tap relay 6
1 ROTOR SELECT Logic 1 pulls in a relay which enables current to flow through
the stator. If this relay is not pulled in, the field lamp circuit is
enabled.
2 SAFETY CONT ENB Logic 1 pulls in a relay whose contacts pull in the safety
contactor which supplies power to the 1 khz inverter. In addition,
the prep switch must be depressed in order to pull in the safety
contactor.
5-9
5-9 Charger and Drive Control
Write only port with address 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 11–D to 11–F. Port se-
TABLE 5–10
CHARGER AND DRIVE CONTROL PORT
0 TRIP BREAKER Logic 1 trips the circuit breaker.
1 CHARGE SCALE–SELECT Logic 1 sets charger to trickle charge rate.

Logic 0 sets charger to full charge rate.
2 CHARGER RELAY Logic 1 connects isolation transformer to charger.
3 REVERSE ONLY Logic 1 motion is allowed in reverse only.
4 FULL SPD ENA Logic 1 enables peak drive speed.

Logic 0 limits drive speed.
5 MOTOR ENA Logic 1 connects the motor drives to the motors

and releases the brakes.
6 DRIVE RESET Logic 1 resets the drive boards.
7 BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL Logic 1 selects charge current feedback.
Logic 0 selects battery voltage feedback.
5-10
5-10 AEC Control
Write only port with address location 1180 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5–A. KVP0 to
KVP4 gives the selected KVP when prep is entered. Port select signal is WRP3*.
TABLE 5–11
AEC CONTROL PORT
0 KVP0
1 KVP1
2 KVP2
3 KVP3
4 KVP4
5 KVP5 Not Used
6 KVP6 Not Used
7 GEN READY Not Used
TABLE 5–12
KVP SELECTION
kVp HEX kVp4 kVp3 kVp2 kVp1 kVp0

50 02H 0 0 0 1 0
52 03H 0 0 0 1 1
54 04H 0 0 1 0 0
56 05H 0 0 1 0 1
58 06H 0 0 1 1 0
60 07H 0 0 1 1 1
62 08H 0 1 0 0 0
64 09H 0 1 0 0 1
66 0AH 0 1 0 1 0
68 0BH 0 1 0 1 1
70 0CH 0 1 1 0 0
72 0DH 0 1 1 0 1
74 0EH 0 1 1 1 0
76 0FH 0 1 1 1 1
80 10H 1 0 0 0 0
85 11H 1 0 0 0 1
90 12H 1 0 0 1 0
95 13H 1 0 0 1 1
100 15H 1 0 1 0 0
105 15H 1 0 1 0 1
110 16H 1 0 1 1 0
115 17H 1 0 1 1 1
120 18H 1 1 0 0 0
125 19H 1 1 0 0 1
5-11
5-11 Generator Control 1
Write only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 6, 7–B. Port se-
TABLE 5–13
GENERATOR CONTROL 1 PORT
0 60HZ EN Logic 1 enables both 60Hz phase 1 and 2 clocks
1 1kHZ EN Logic 1 enables both 1 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks to

the1 kHz inverter
2 2kHz EN Logic 1 enables both 2 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks and

16 kHz clock to the Filament control board.
3 LOW RESOLUTION Logic 1 selects low timer resolution for mAs >=12.5
Logic 0 selects high timer resolution for mAs <12.5
4 60 Hz RELAY Logic 1 brings power to the 60 Hz Inverter.
5 PREHEAT Logic 1 turns on filament preheat; boosts the filament
6 START EXP Logic 1 initiates the exposure hardware synchronizes this

signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed
<10mS.
7 STOP EXP Logic 1 terminates the exposure hardware synchronizes this

signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed
<10mS.
5-12
5-12 A/D Control
Write only port with address 1280 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5 6–E. AMUX0 through
AMUX3 determine which of 16 possible A/D inputs are selected. See the A/D Input Select
table below. Port select signal is WRP5*.
TABLE 5–14
A/D CONTROL PORT
0 AMUX0
1 AMUX1
2 AMUX2
3 AMUX3
4 spare
5 spare
6 READ A/D Logic 1 enables A/D output read when the A/D output is read
Logic 0 allows an A/D conversion when the A/D output is read
7 HOLD Logic 1 places the A/D sample and hold device into the
hold mode
Logic 0 puts it into the sample mode
TABLE 5–15
A/D INPUT SELECT
SELECTED INPUTHEX AMUX3 AMUX2 AMUX1

AMUX0
Spare 00H 0 0 0 0
Spare 01H 0 0 0 1
RGT MAN TDS OUT 02H 0 0 1 0
LFT MAN TDS OUT 03H 0 0 1 1
Spare 04H 0 1 0 0
RIGHT DRV FDBK 05H 0 1 0 1
LEFT DRV FDBK 06H 0 1 1 0
KVP DMN FDBK 07H 0 1 1 1
FIL FDBK 08H 1 0 0 0
LEAKAGE COMP FDBK 09H 1 0 0 1
Spare 0AH 1 0 1 0
Spare 0BH 1 0 1 1
+40V V.F. DISP SUPPLY 0CH 1 1 0 0
SIGNAL GROUND 0DH 1 1 0 1
+24V VF SUPPLY 0EH 1 1 1 0
+5V LOGIC SUPPLY 0FH 1 1 1 1
5-13
5-13 Set Back–Up Time
Write only port with address location 1300 hex. Port select signal is WRP6*. Schematic
location; sheet 6, F–3. Writing to this port just before an exposure sets the back–up time as
follows:
Back–Up Counts = ((MAS 60) 70 + 5)
The actual back–up time is equal to (Back–Up Count 16.67) millisec since the back–up
timer is clocked at 60Hz.
5-14 On–Board Control
location; sheet 5, 9–B. FREQ FDBK0 and FREQ FDBK1 select which frequency feed-
back the 80C31 frequency counter looks at. See Frequency Feedback Select table below.
TABLE 5–16
ON–BOARD CONTROL PORT
0 UART MUX CNTRL Logic 1 selects spare data as serial output and input
Not used on CPU 46-264974 Logic 0 selects Display data as serial output and switch
data as serial input
1 PWR DOWN RST HOLDOFF Logic 0 advanced power down signal resets processor
Logic 1 holds off the reset.
2 DISP RST Logic 1 resets the display controller
3 spare
4 spare
5 FREQ FDBK 0
6 FREQ FDBK 1
7 FREQ FDBK 2
TABLE 5–17
FREQUENCY FEEDBACK SELECT
SELECTED FEEDBACK HEX FDBK 2 FDBK 1 FDBK 0
mAs from Filament Control PWB 00H 0 0 0

Battery Voltage / Charging Current 01H 0 0 1
Output 0 from the Programmable Timer 02H 0 1 0
Spare 05H 1 0 1
Spare 06H 1 1 0
Spare 07H 1 1 1
5-14
5-15 Right Speed Command DAC
location; sheet 4, D–2. The data written to this address is the Right Wheel Speed Command,
where:
0 = full forward
127 = zero speed
255 = full reverse
5-16 Left Speed Command DAC
location; sheet 4, D–2. The data written to this address is the Left Wheel Speed Command,
where:
255 = full forward
127 = zero speed
0 = full reverse
5-17 Charge Current DAC
Write only port with location 1480 hex. Port select signal is WRP9*. Schematic location;
Sheet 4, F–2. Data written to this address controls the Charging Current. When the
TRICKLE CHARGE bit is set to “0”, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 5 Amps of charge current. With
TRICKLE CHARGE set to “1”, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 0.5 Amps of charge current.
This DAC also is used in the DRIVE mode to check the integrity of the Handle Circuitry.
255 – enables handle transducer signal.
0 – forces the handle signal to 0.6V (diode drop).
5-18 Leakage Current Compensation DAC
location; sheet 4, F–2. Data written to this address is the Leakage Current Compensation.
5-19 Programmable Timer
Writing to the following addresses controls the timer as listed below. Port select signal is
WRP10*. Schematic location; sheet 6, D–6. Note that access to this timer occurs only dur-
ing system initialization.
ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
1500H Writes data to counter 0

1503H Writes data to the Control Word Register
5-15
5-20 Filament Current Demand DAC
Write only port with the following address locations; 1580H low nibble, 1581 medium nib-
ble, 1582H high nibble, 1583H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is
WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B–2. Data written to this address is the Filament
Current Demand. 0H = filament current of approximately 4.5A and 4096H = filament cur-
rent of approximately 5.5A
5-21 KVP Demand DAC
Write only port with the following address locations; 1584H low nibble, 1585H middle nib-
ble, 1586H high nibble, 1587H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is
WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B–2. Data written to this address is the kVp De-
mand. 0H = 0kVp and 4095H = 145kVp
5-22 Watchdog Timer
location; sheet 2, E–2. Writing to this port retriggers the watchdog timer. Data is irrelevant.
This port must be written to once every 30ms or the watchdog will timeout.
5-23 Variables Unique To PROMS

46–302688G1/46–302687G1 and
46–303272G1/46–303273G1
52DH–52EH Monitor_zero_cap_millivolts Corresponds to 0% on bar graph

544H Recycle time Time between charge cycles
546H No_trickle_counter # of times since last full charge
547H Trickle_lmt # of cutoff cycles before full charge
548H–549H No_trickle–counter_mem total # of charge cycles
5-16
Sections 5-24, 5-25, 5-26 and 5-27 cover AMX-4 Units with:
ATTENTION
Proms 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later, and CPU Board 46-264974.
5-24 kVp/mAs Display

After Exposure
Note: This function interacts with Section 5Ć26 function below since they share the
same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time.
If the customer would want to inhibit the feature that stops the kVp/mAs display from flash-
ing after exposure, then do as follows:
Load – Location C98 hex with 79H
Load – Location C99 hex with 63H
To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 7963H
(e.g., 0000H).
5-25 Critical Status

Read only port internal to the 8031. Use address FFFF to read this port.
Bit 0 – Prep switch
Bit 1 – Exp Switch
Bit 2 – Tube Pressure Switch
Bit 3 – 60Hz OK
Bit 4 – Rotor
Bit 5 – 1 kHz RDY
Bit 6 – Fil Shorted
5-26 Force the Use

of 137 kV in Tapcal
Note: This is for reference only. This would not normally be done.
Note: This function interacts with Section 5Ć24 function above since they share the
same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time.
The new code allows Tapcal below 137 kV at low battery voltages. Loading these locations
will force the use of 137 kV as in previous code.
Load location C98 hex with 8AH
Load location C99 hex with 74H
To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 8A74H
(e.g., 0000H).
5-27 Force an Extended

Charge Cycle
Loading this location will force an extended charge cycle. (Refer to Section 13–13.)
Load location CA5 hex with 15H
This extended charge cycle is transparent to the user.
5-17
SECTION 6
DATA LOG
ILLUSTRATION 6–1
DATA LOG
6-1 Introduction
To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Data Log main-
tains a history of AMX–4 operation. As shown on Illustration 6–1 there are three Data Log
functions:
VIEW DATA LOG

INIT DATA LOG
LOAD DATA LOG
6-2 Enter Data Log
Illustration 6–1 shows Data Log selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path.
Exit Data Log by pressing mAsă at any of the three Data Log function prompts listed
above. The prompt changes to DATA LOG, indicating that Data Log is closed and another
selection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu.
ILLUSTRATION 6–2
DATA LOG DISPLAY
HEX VALUE
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËËË
Prompts
Increase
Value
kVp UP
ËËËË mAs UP
Exit
mAs Enter Value

Decrease kVp DOWN or
Refer to Illustration 6–2. Data Log items appear on the Message Display directly above the
kVp and mAs switches. Values appearing on the kVp and mAs display are a Hexadecimal
equivalent of the Decimal number. Numbers are valid only if Data Log has been initialized.
Following is a sequential listing of Data Log items:
6-1
For Proms 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 or 46–303272G1/46–303273G1:
MON MODE TIMER – software monitor on time in minutes.

DRIVE MODE TIMER – drive time in minutes.
CHARGE MODE TIMER – charging time in hours.
X-RAY MODE TIMER – prep and expose time in seconds.
TTL ON-TIME TMR – total on time in hours.
NUM EQALIZ CYCLE – number of complete equalization cycles. (Appears but
is not used.)
NUM CHARGE CYCLE – number of complete charge cycles.
TOTL AMP HR CHRG – amount of charge returned to batteries.
AHR SINCE EQALIZ – amount of charge returned to battery since last complete
equalization cycle. (Appears but is not used.)
EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures.
ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules.
EXP TIME METER – exposure on time in milliseconds.
6-2
For Proms 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later:
MON MODE TIMER – software monitor on time in hours.

DRIVE MODE TIMER – drive time in minutes.
CHARGE MODE TIMER – charging time in hours.
X-RAY MODE TIMER – prep and expose time in seconds.
TTL ON-TIME TMR – total on time in hours.
HIGH CHG TIMER - high charge time in hours.
NUM CHARGE CYCLE – number of complete charge cycles.
TOTL AMP HR CHRG – amount of charge returned to batteries.
NUM CHG INIT – number charge cycles initiated.
EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures.
ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules.
EXP TIME METER – exposure on time in milliseconds.
6-2-1 Enter View Data Log

Display Data Log Items and there values.
kVp kVp VIEW DATA LOG
mAs MON MODE TIMER
kVp
kVp
mAs EXITING------VIEW DATA LOGindicating that the data log viewing is
closed and another selection may be made from the data log menu.
6-3
6-2-2 Enter Initialize Data Log

Set all data log elements to zero. Initializing the Data Log at installation, just before turning
the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating parameters can be followed.
INT DATA LOG.
kVp kVp INT DATA LOG

mAs
The prompt goes blank, then changes to INT DATA LOG, indicating that Initialize Data
Log is closed and another selection may be made from the Data Log menu.
6-3 Load Data Log

Set the value of a data log element. This is necessary if the X–Ray Tube or batteries are
replaced. (If the X–ray tube is replaced, load zeros in the exposure counter and there is no
need to initialize the Data Log).
kVp kVp LOAD DATA LOG
mAs MON MODE TIMER
kVp kVp
mAsă
kVp kVp
mAsăkVp kVp
The number of digits varies from one item to the next. Repeat this process until the value
has been entered.
mAsăEXITING------LOAD DATA LOG
6-4
SECTION 7
ERROR LOG
ILLUSTRATION 7–1
ERROR LOG
DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
PASSWORD
kVp kVp REQUIRED
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGER
ERROR LIST HISTOGRAMS
7-1 Introduction
To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics.
Error Log maintains an error occurrence history which can be helpful when diagnosing
problems. Calibration errors, and errors encountered when entering Diagnostics are not re-
corded. As shown on Illustration 7–1 there are two Error Log functions:
1. ERROR LIST the order in which errors occurred.

2. HISTOGRAMS the number of times an error occurred.
Both the Error List and Histograms can be initialized, setting all data to zero, to establish a
starting point from which errors can be monitored.
Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which
errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit
over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed.
7-1
ILLUSTRATION 7–2
ERROR LOG DISPLAY
ERROR CODE NUMBER OF

HEXADECIMAL 00 000 OCCURRENCES
DECIMAL
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs

DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËËË
Prompts
Display
ËËËË mAs UP
Exit
Next kVp UP
Error
mAs
DOWN
Display Enter
kVp
Previous
Error DOWN
7-2 Entering Error Log
Illustration 7–2 shows Error Log selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. The prompt ERROR LIST displays when you are in Error Log. Shaded boxes
illustrate the selection path.
Exit Error Log by pressing mAsă at either of the Error Log function prompts. The
prompt changes to ERROR LOG, indicating that Error Log is closed and another seĆ
lection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu.
Error log prompts appear on the Message Display directly above the kVp and mAs
switches. Error Codes and the number of times they occurred appear on the kVp and mAs
Display. Errors display as Hexadecimal numbers, while the occurrence is a decimal
number.
7-2
ILLUSTRATION 7–3
ERROR LIST
ERROR LOG
mAs kVp
ENTER TOGGLE
kVp
TOGGLE
VIEW INIT VIEW INIT

ERROR LIST ERROR LIST HISTOGRAMS HISTOGRAMS
7-2-1 View Error List
Error List tells you the order in which errors have occurred. It has room for 256 errors. The
first error to display when viewing the error list is the first error which occurred. This is the
oldest error listed. The most recent error is at the end of the list. Each time an error occurs it
is logged at the end of the error list. If an error occurs 20 times in secession, it’s code will
occupy 20 consecutive spaces. This appears as if there is no response to stepping up or down
through the list. You must count the number of steps to determine the number of occur-
rences.
Illustration 7–3 shows Error List selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use
the following procedure to view the Error List:
1. Press kVp until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST.
3. Press mAs . The prompt changes to START OF LIST. Press kVp , and the
earliest error code number appears on the kVp and mAs display. If the list is
empty the prompt LIST IS EMPTY displays followed by VIEW ERROR LIST.
4. Pressing and holding kVp or kVp scrolls to end or start of list.
5. Pressing kVp displays the next error. The prompt END OF LIST displays
momentarily when the end of the list is reached.
6. Pressing kVp displays the previous error.
7. Press mAs . The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW ERĆ
ROR LIST indicating that the error list viewing is closed.
8. Pressing mAs . The display changes to ERROR LIST indicating that the Error
List is closed.
7-3
7-2-2 Initialize Error List
Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which
errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit
over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed.
Illustration 7–3 shows Error List selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use
the following procedure to initialize the Error List:
1. Press kVp until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST.
3. Press kVp . The prompt changes to INIT ERROR LIST.
4. Press mAs . The prompt goes blank, then INIT ERROR LIST redisplays, indiĆ
cating that the error list has been initialized.
5. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LIST.
6. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the Error
List is closed.
7-4
ILLUSTRATION 7–4
HISTOGRAM
ERROR LOG
kVp mAs
ENTER
TOGGLE
kVp
TOGGLE
VIEW INIT VIEW INIT

ERROR LIST ERROR LIST HISTOGRAMS HISTOGRAMS
7-3 View Histograms
Histogram tells you the number of times an error occurred. It is arranged in error code order.
Each time an error occurs it is logged in the Histogram. If an error has not occurred, the error
code will not display. Histogram displays the hexadecimal error code number above kVp
and the number of occurrences as a decimal number above mAs.
Illustration 7–4 shows Histogram selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use
the following procedure to view the Error List:
1. Press kVp until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS.
3. Press mAs .
00ăă000 appears on the kVp and mAs display.
4. Pressing kVp displays the next error. If the list is empty the prompt HISTO
LIST EMPTY displays followed by VIEW HISTOGRAMS.
5. Pressing kVp displays the previous error.
6. Press mAs . The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW HISĆ
TOGRAMS indicating that Histogram viewing is closed.
7. Pressing mAs . The display changes to HISTOGRAMS indicating that the
Histograms is closed.
7-5
7-4 Initialize Histograms
Initializing Histograms empties it’s buffer. This provides a starting point from which you
may track errors. Initializing Histograms at installation, just before turning the unit over,
provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed.
Illustration 7–4 shows Histogram selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use
the following procedure to initialize the Error List:
1. Press kVp until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS.
3. Press kVp . The prompt changes to INIT HISTOGRAMS.
4. Press mAs . The prompt goes blank, then INIT HISTOGRAMS redisplays,
indicating that the Histogram list has been initialized.
5. Press mAs . The display changes to HISTOGRAMS.
6. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the HistoĆ
grams is closed.
7-6
7-5 Error List
Table 7–1 is a complete cross reference of error code numbers to error names. Refer to Table
12–1 Power Up Error Codes, and Table 12–3 Applications Error Codes for the probable
cause of the error and recommended service actions.
Random RAM patterns appearing to be Error Codes other than those listed in Table 7–1
occur when the CPU Board or RAM are replaced. Prevent confusion this misinformation
causes by initializing Error List and Histograms at installation and whenever the CPU
Board or RAM are replaced.
TABLE 7–1
ERROR CODE TO ERROR NAME CROSS REFERENCE
Error Error Error Error

Code Name Code Name
(On Operator Display)
01 Error 101 43 Error 443

02 Error 102 44 Battery Too High
03 Error 103 45 Battery Too Low
12 Left Drive Stall 59 Error 459
13 Right Drive Stall 5A Error 45A
14 Error 214 5B Error 45B
15 Error 215 5C Error 45C
16 Error 216 5D Error 45D
17 Error 217 5E Error 45E
18 Error 218 5F Error 45F
19 RELEASE HANDLE 60 Error 460
23 Display Error 23 65 Error 465(displayed
after 100 occurrences)
2F Error 42F 67 Error 467
32 Error 432 70 Halting Error 70
33 Error 433 81 Test - 01 Failed
3A Error 43A 86 Test - 06 Failed
3B Error 43B 87 Test - 07 Failed
3D Error 43D
3E Error 43E (displayed
after 100 occurrences)
7-7
7-8
SECTION 8
CHARGER
ILLUSTRATION 8–1
CHARGER
DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
PASSWORD
kVp kVp REQUIRED
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
CHARGE
SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG BATTERYS
8-1 Introduction
To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics.
Charger provides a means by which the batteries may be charged when the AMX is not
completely calibrated. The Voltmeter and Charger MUST be calibrated before this proce-
dure is used. Other calibration procedures may be delayed until batteries are charged.
Charging by this method is identical to charging in the Applications Mode.
CAUTION Battery damage may occur if Charger is used when the Voltmeter and
Charger are not properly calibrated
8-1
8-2 Entering Charger
Illustration 8–2 shows Charger selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. The prompt PLUG IN CHARGER
displays when you are in Charger.
Exit Charger at the prompt PLUG IN CHARGER by turning the key switch off.
ILLUSTRATION 8–2
CHARGE BATTERIES
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
ËËË
Prompts
kVp UP
ËËË mAs UP
mAs
DOWN
Enter
kVp
DOWN
1. Press kVp until the CHARGE BATTERYS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to PLUG IN CHARGER.
3. Plug the charging cord into a convenience outlet. The prompt changes to
SWITCH TO RUN.
4. Set the Service Switch to the Run position. The prompt changes to CHARGING.
Turn the key switch to the OFF position.
5. Unplug charger when CHARGE COMPLETE prompt displays.
The CHARGING prompt appears on the Message Display and the % of charge display is lit
and functioning. This method of charging is identical to charging in the Applications Mode,
however, the bargraph will not update in this mode. It is recommended the voltmeter be
recalibrated after charging to reset the bargraph to the actual voltage.
8-2
SECTION 9
DATA BASE ACCESS
ENTERING IMPROPER DATA CAN SUBJECT THE PATIENT AND OPĆ

WARNING ERATOR TO EXCESSIVE RADIATION OR IT CAN DAMAGE THE X-
RAY TUBE. IT MAY CAUSE UNEXPECTED DRIVE RESPONSE WHICH
CAN INJURE THE OPERATOR AND OTHERS. KNOW WHAT RESULTS
TO EXPECT BEFORE CHANGING DATA VALUES. TEST YOUR
CHANGES TO MAKE SURE THEY ARE CORRECT.
9-1 Introduction
Data Base Access provides direct access to the calibration and configuration data base.
Data may be checked to see that it is within specified values, and it may be altered to opti-
mize operation.
Always record the address and data before making changes so you can return to where you
started. Always test your changes to make sure they are correct.
Be very careful when altering data. It is possible to enter data that will make the AMX–4
operate improperly, causing damage to the unit, injuring a patient, or when attempting to
drive the unit, injuring the operator and pedestrians.
ILLUSTRATION 9–1
SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION
KEY SWITCH
ÉÉ
É
SERVICE
SWITCH
IN LEFT
SIDE
9-2 Entering Data Base Access
Before using Data Base Access you must start the Service Program, not the Diagnostics
Program. To start the service program, perform the following steps:
1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 9-1 down to the service position.
2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods.
If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position.
If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for two sec-
onds and then back ON again.
9-1
If power is on and the top cover is removed providing access to the processor
board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board
46–264974, or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46–232828).
When the service program is ready the END SERVCăMODE menu selection appears on
the Message Display.
ILLUSTRATION 9–2
DATA BASE MENU SELECTION
SERVICE PROGRAM
kVp kVp
PREVIOUS NEXT
mAs
ENTER
END SERVC MODE DATA BASE CALIBRATE SYSTEM

ACCESS
After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DATA BASE ACĆ
CESS menu selection.
Illustration 9–2 shows Data Base Access selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă
DATA BASE ACCESS.
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DATA BASE ACCESS menu selection
appears.
2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that
Data Base Access may be entered.
9-2-1 Entering Password
Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After the pass-
word is entered, a hexadecimal address and data value appear on the kVp and mAs display.
When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed
by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DATA BASE ACCESS. Press mAs to re–enter Data
Base Access.
If the password is not available, press mAsĂ until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears.
The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the
power off.
9-2
9-2-2 Exit Without Changes
To exit DATA BASE ACCESS press mAsĂ when one of the menu selections shown on
Illustration 9–2 displays.
The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DATA BASE ACCESS indicating

that DATA BASE ACCESS is not active. To return to the applications program, perform
the following steps:
1. Press either kVp or kVp until the END SERVICE MODE menu selection
appears.
3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE
KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for 2 seconds, then back ON again.
4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.
ILLUSTRATION 9–3
DATA BASE DISPLAY
Address Data
kVp mAs
kVp AND mAs

DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
Prompts
ËËËË
And
Errors
mAs UP
Increase Exit
kVp UP
Value
mAs
DOWN
Enter Value
Decrease kVp Or
9-3 Data Base Display

After entering Data Base Access, a hexadecimal address and data value displays on the kVp
and mAs display as shown on Illustration 9–3. Data values display as either a two digit or a
four digit hexadecimal number. Data Base address locations are sequential hexadecimal
numbers. Section 10 Data Base for AMX–4 Units with: PROMS
46–302688G1/46–302687G1 or 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 and CPU Boards
46–232828 or 46–264974, or Section 11 Data Base for AMX–4 Units with: PROMS
46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1, or 46–329187G1/
46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/ 46–329188G2 and CPU Board 46–264974 contain a
complete data base listing.
9-3
9-4 Selecting Data Base Address

See Illustration 9–3. Pressing kVp increases the address location and pressing kVp
decreases the address location. You may scroll the address by pressing and holding the
switch, or change one location at a time by pressing and releasing the switch.
When you reach the address location of the data you wish to change, press mAsă. The
address display turns off leaving only data on the kVp and mAs display. To exit the address
location without changing data, press mAsă.
9-5 Changing Data Base Values

Data is changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and mov-
ing right to the least significant character. Change data by using kVp and kVp to
select the proper hexadecimal value, then press mAsă to enter the value and move to the
next character. (On units with Proms 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later on Board CPU
46–264974, the selected digit will flash.)
Data displayed on the mAs and kVp display is entered into the data base either when
mAsă is pressed to exit the address, or when mAsă is pressed to enter the last value.
The address and new data appears on the kVp and mAs display after entering data.
9-6 Check Sum and Limit Errors
You can always read Data Base Access. However, you can write only to areas containing a
valid check sum. The area where the check sum error occurred must be re–calibrated before
access is allowed. Why? A new check sum must be calculated every time data changes. If
you change the wrong value you could damage the AMX–4, or leave it in a non–compliant
condition.
A Limit Error occurs when a value is entered that is above or below preset limits. A limit
error prompt occurs after out of range data is entered. What happens? The data you entered
is compared with it’s upper and lower limits. If it is outside of the limit, the original value is
placed in the data base instead of the value you entered.
During this demonstration you will learn to operate Data Base Access. You will also see the
relationship between Calibration and Configuration Data Base. First, you will enter out of
range data to see the response to a limit error. Then you will use Data Base Access to change
data and test the change. Finally, you will change data using Calibration, test the change and
verify the change using Data Base Access.
Let’s look at an example of Data Base Access. Field light on time is used for this demonstra-
tion because it presents the fewest problems if things go wrong. If a problem should arise as
you try this example, simply enter calibration and reset the field light on time.
9-4
ILLUSTRATION 9–4
HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION
9-7-1 Enter Data Base Access
1. Place the service switch in the service position (down) and turn the power on.
After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC
MODE.
2. Press kVp to display the prompt DATA BASE ACCESS, then press mAsă.
The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD--.
3. Enter the password. An address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display.
Press kVp , then kVp to see how the address changes. Pressing and holding
the button scrolls the display. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and
6 as shown on Illustration 9-4. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6.
ILLUSTRATION 9–5
FIELD LIGHT ON–TIME DISPLAY
2E kVp AND mAs

1BB DISPLAY
kVp mAs
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
Prompts
and
ËËËË
Errors
Increase
mAs UP
Value
Exit
kVp UP
mAs
DOWN
Decrease kVp Enter Value

DOWN or
Value Shift Data Entry
9-5
9-7-2 Change Field Light On–Time
Change the Field Light On–Time to more than 45 seconds. Because one bit equals one sec-
ond, this location must be set to 2E Hex or higher to exceed the maximum value. Refer to
Table 9–1, Field Light On–Time Values.
Entering the specified data in a location other than address 1BB could damĆ
CAUTION age the AMX-4. Make sure the address is correct before entering data.
1. Select the Field Light On-Time address 1BB shown on Illustration 9-5. This
address is very near the end of the data base. Press kVp to scroll from the top
of the data base to the bottom. Press mAsă when address 1BB displays. The
address disappears from the kVp and mAs display, leaving the two data characĆ
ters. Record this Hex value in the margin so you can return to this setting later.
2. Press kVp , then kVp to see how the first data character changes, then
change this character to 2.
Notice that characters will not scroll, they change when the switch is released.
3. Press mAsă setting the first character to 2 and allowing the second character
to be changed. Press kVp , then kVp to see how the second data character
changes, then change this character to E.
4. Press mAsă. The prompt changes to FLDLT BYT LIMIT. Press mAsă. The
prompt changes to OLD VALUE RESTRD.
What happened? The value you entered was higher than the maximum value, so the pro-
gram returned (restored) the original value to the data base.
5. Enter the hex value 2D in address location 1BB. This corresponds to a lamp on-
time of 45 seconds.
9-7-3 Test Change
By going to the application program you will see the changes introduced by entering your
data.
1. Exit the Service Program by pressing kVp or kVp until the prompt END
SERVC MODE appears.
2. Press mAsă. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN.
3. Set the Service Switch to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY
SWITCH.
4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed.
5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 45 seconds.
Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.
9-6
9-7-4 Enter Calibration
Enter calibration and check the Field Light On–Time to check the value.
1. Turn the Power Key Switch to OFF. Set the Service Switch to the service posiĆ
tion. Turn the Power Key Switch to the ON position.
2. Press kVp to display the prompt CALIBRATE SYSTEM, then press mAsă.
The prompt changes to CAL DRIVE HANDLE.
3. Press kVp until the prompt CAL FLD LT TIME appears, then press mAsă.
The prompt changes to ENTER VALUE indicating that Field Light On-Time
has been entered. The Field Light On-Time of 045.00 appears on the kVp and
mAs Display.
9-7-5 Change Field Light On–Time
Now, while still in the calibration mode, change the Field Light On–Time to 15 seconds.
This is represented by 0F Hex in the data base.
1. Select 15 second on-time by holding the switch down to scroll the values.
Pressing kVp increases on–time in 0.1 second increments.
Pressing kVp decreases on–time in 0.1 second increments.
2. Press mAs when 15 appears. The prompt changes to CAL FLD LT TIME.
3. Press mAs . The prompt changes to CALIBRATE SYSTEM.
The display shows tenths of a second, but only seconds are saved. If a value greater than 45
seconds or less than 5 seconds is entered, the error FLDLT BYTE LIMT displays until mAs
is pressed, then FLDLIT TIME LIMT is displayed. The Field Light On–Time is set to
the limit that was exceeded. Press mAs again to exit.
9-7-6 Test Change Again
By going to the application program you will see that the collimator light will stay on for 15
seconds.
1. Press kVp until the prompt END SERVC MODE displays.

3. Set the Service Switch up to the application position. The prompt changes to
CYCLE KEY SWITCH.
4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed.
5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 15 seconds.
Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.
9-7
9-7-7 Enter Data Base Access
Enter Data Base Access to verify the 15 second change. The address 1BB and data 0F ap-
pear on the kVp and mAs display indicating that the Field Light on Time is set to 15 sec-
onds.
TABLE 9–1
FIELD LIGHT ON–TIME VALUES
ON–TIME HEX VALUE ON–TIME HEX VALUE ON–TIME HEX VALUE
5 05 20 14 35 23
10 0A 25 19 40 28
15 0F 30 1E 45 2D
9-7-8 On Your Own
You have used Data Base Access to change a calibration value. Then you tested the change
and you saw the result of entering out of range data. Table 9–1 contains some Field Light
On–Times in seconds and the Data Base hexadecimal values. Enter some of these values to
see that valid data is accepted. Test your changes to see that values from 5 seconds, 05 Hex,
to 45 seconds, 2D Hex, are accepted. You may enter a value that is less than 5 seconds to see
that it produces the same results that too long a time produced.
By now you can see that as long as the Data Base Value is within it’s minimum and maxi-
mum range, the program will accept it. You have seen that you can do no damage with Field
Light On–Time. With other parts of the data base this is not the case. Improper values can
destroy the batteries or X–Ray Tube and most every thing in between. Don’t be afraid of
using Data Base Access. But when you use it, use it carefully.
9-7-9 Return The Original Value
Enter the original hexadecimal value that you wrote in the margin in Section 9-7-2, Change
Field Light On–Time. Test the unit to make sure it is operating properly before leaving.
9-8 Floor Scuffing
Some units leave marks on the floor when accelerating. Reducing the Acceleration Factor
reduces this problem. Refer to Acceleration Factor (address 01 6A) in Table 10–6, Drive
Parameters, or Table 11–5, Drive Parameters (whichever is appropriate for PROMS in this
unit), and experiment with the value until the scuffing is reduced. After the data change, be
sure to recalibrate the drive handle.
9-8
SECTION 10
DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:
PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1
OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974
10-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters
This section contains a complete listing of the AMX–4 Data Base.
TABLE 10–1
CALIBRATIBLE X–RAY PARAMETERS
Data Address Default Maximum Minimum

Hex Value Hex Value Hex Value Hex Value
X–RAY BYTES
Counts Per mAs00 00 99 C8 64
This value is established during calibration,
do not change with Data Base Access. The
number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of
X–ray emission.
Battery Recovery Time 00 01 14 1E 0A

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will
be displayed after an exposure. This is the
time it takes the batteries to recover after an
exposure so that technique accuracy can be
guaranteed.
Max Prep to Exposure Time 00 02 1E 28 0A

The maximum time in seconds that the unit
can remain in “prep” before an exit is forced.
Initial Heat Wait Time 00 03 5A 78 3C

The maximum heat wait time in seconds re-
quired after an exposure.
Max Filament Current Change 00 04 0A 10 00

The maximum number of DAC counts the
Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table
Elements can change after most exposures.
Used only during auto calibration.
Leakage Current at 50 kVp 00 05 00 64 00

The number of leakage current DAC counts
required at 50kVp to give proper leakage com-
pensation.
10-1
TABLE 10–1 (CONT.)


Leakage Current at 80 kVp 00 06 0A C8 00

pensation.
Leakage Current at 125 kVp 00 07 21 FA 0A

required at 125kVp to give proper leakage
compensation.
Last Calibratible Tap 00 08 12 1B 10

This value is established during calibration, do
not change with Data Base Access. The index
of the last tap combination that could be cali-
brated during Tap Cal.
Filament Current Calibrated 00 09 FF FF 00

not change with Data Base Access. Hex value
01 indicates the filament current tables have
been calibrated, any other value is false.
kVp Calibrated 00 0A FF FF 00
01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated, any
other value is false.
X–ray Bytes not used: 00B, 00C, 00D, 00E.
X–RAY WORDS
Turn off Delay at 50 kVp 00 0F 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA
not change with Data Base Access. The time
in microseconds between the EXP STOP
CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at
50kVp. This time is used to determine when to
terminate the exposure in order to get the se-
lected mAs.
10-2


Turn off Delay at 80 kVp 00 11 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA

lected mAs.

120kVp. This time is used to determine when
to terminate the exposure in order to get the
selected mAs.
Ideal kVp1 Output 00 15 04 C9 05 C3 03 CF

not change with Data Base Access. The DAC
counts required to get 52 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp2 Output 00 17 05 F5 06 EF 04 FB

Ideal kVp3 Output 00 19 08 40 09 33 07 3F

Ideal kVp4 Output 00 1B 0C B2 0D AC 0B BB

Actual kVp1 Output 00 1D 02 08 02 3A 01 D6

not change with Data Base Access. Actual
kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the
Ideal kVp1 Output DAC count. This parameter
is entered during kVp calibration.
10-3


Actual kVp2 Output 00 1F 02 80 02 B2 02 4E

Actual kVp3 Output 00 21 03 52 03 84 03 20

Actual kVp4 Output 00 23 04 BB 04 E2 04 7E

mAs Frequency at 100 mA 00 25 3B 92 4E 20 2710

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This
value is calculated during mAs calibration.
10-4
10-2 Auto Cal Filament Current
This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Table
10–2 is the first of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between fila-
ment current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations.
This table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.
TABLE 10–2
AUTO CAL FILAMENT CURRENT
kVp at 90 mA 110 mA
Address Default Max Min Address Default Max Min
50 kVp 00 27 08 09 0F 64 03 0C 00 29 0A 18 0F FF 04 EC
52 kVp 00 2B 07 F5 0F 61 02 E1 00 2D 09 FF 0F FF 04 CB
54 kVp 00 2F 07 E1 0F 37 02 B7 00 31 09 E6 0F FE 04 AA
56 kVp 00 33 07 CD 0F 0C 02 8C 00 35 09 CD 0F DD 04 89
58 kVp 00 37 07 B9 0E E2 02 62 00 39 09 B5 0F BC 04 68
60 kVp 00 3B 07 A5 0E D8 02 4C 00 3D 09 9C 0F 9C 04 48
62 kVp 00 3F 07 91 0E CC 02 35 00 41 09 83 0F 7B 04 27
64 kVp 00 43 07 7D 0E B3 02 15 00 45 09 6A 0F 64 04 06
66 kVp 00 47 07 6D 0E 9C 01 F4 00 49 09 59 0F 5A 03 E5
68 kVp 00 4B 07 5E 0E 90 01 DE 00 4D 09 48 0F 4A 03 C4
70 kVp 00 4F 07 4E 0E 83 01 C7 00 51 09 37 0F 3E 03 A4
72 kVp 00 53 07 3E 0E 6D 01 BB 00 55 09 27 0F 31 03 83
74 kVp 00 57 07 2E 0E 56 01 AE 00 59 09 16 0F 1A 03 62
76 kVp 00 5B 07 1F 0E 4A 01 A2 00 5D 09 05 0F 5D 03 41
80 kVp 00 5F 06 FF 0E 31 01 89 00 61 08 E3 0F 4E 03 00
85 kVp 00 63 06 D8 0E 0C 01 6E 00 65 08 B9 0F 40 02 D4
90 kVp 00 67 06 B9 0D DD 01 53 00 69 08 8B 0E FD 02 A9
95 kVp 00 6B 06 9A 0D AE 01 38 00 6D 08 5D 0F 29 02 7D
100 kVp 00 6F 06 7B 0D 80 01 1E 00 71 08 2F 0E D2 02 52
105 kVp 00 73 06 5B 0D 51 01 03 00 75 08 01 0E A6 02 26
110 kVp 00 77 06 3C 0D 22 00 DE 00 79 07 D3 0E 7B 01 FB
115 kVp 00 7B 06 1D 0C F3 00 C7 00 7D 07 A5 0E 4F 01 CF
120 kVp 00 7F 05 FE 0C C5 00 A9 00 81 07 77 0E 24 01 A4
125 kVp 00 83 05 DF 0C 96 00 7A 00 85 07 49 0D F8 01 78
10-5
10-3 Filament Current Calibration Table
This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is
the second of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between filament
current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This
table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is cop-
ied into Table 10–2 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.
TABLE 10–3
FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE
kVp at 90 mA 110 mA
50 kVp 00 87 08 09 0F 64 03 0C 00 89 0A 18 0F FF 04 EC
54 kVp 00 8F 07 E1 0F 37 02 B7 00 91 09 E6 0F FE 04 AA
56 kVp 00 93 07 CD 0F 0C 02 8C 00 95 09 CD 0F DD 04 89
58 kVp 00 97 07 B9 0E E2 02 62 00 99 09 B5 0F BC 04 68
60 kVp 00 9B 07 A5 0E D8 02 4C 00 9D 09 9C 0F 9C 04 4B
62 kVp 00 9F 07 91 0E CC 02 35 00 A1 09 83 0F 7B 04 27
64 kVp 00 A3 07 7D 0E B3 02 15 00 A5 09 6A 0F 64 04 06
66 kVp 00 A7 07 6D 0E 9C 01 F4 00 A9 09 59 0F 5A 03 E5
68 kVp 00 AB 07 5E 0E 90 01 DE 00 AD 09 48 0F 4A 03 C4
70 kVp 00 AF 07 4E 0E 83 01 C7 00 B1 09 37 0F 3E 03 A4
72 kVp 00 B3 07 3E 0E 6D 01 BB 00 B5 09 27 0F 31 03 83
74 kVp 00 B7 07 2E 0E 56 01 AE 00 B9 09 16 0F 1A 03 62
76 kVp 00 BB 07 1F 0E 4A 01 A2 00 BD 09 05 0F 5D 03 41
80 kVp 00 BF 06 FF 0E 31 01 89 00 C1 08 E3 0F 4E 03 00
85 kVp 00 C3 06 D8 0E 0C 01 6E 00 C5 08 B9 0F 40 02 D4
90 kVp 00 C7 06 B9 0D DD 01 53 00 C9 08 8B 0F 29 02 A9
95 kVp 00 CB 06 9A 0D AE 01 38 00 CD 08 5D 0E FD 02 7D
100 kVp 00 CF 06 7B 0D 80 01 1E 00 D1 08 2F 0E D2 02 52
105 kVp 00 D3 06 5B 0D 51 01 03 00 D5 08 01 0E A6 02 26
110 kVp 00 D7 06 3C 0D 22 00 DE 00 D9 07 D3 0E 7B 01 FB
115 kVp 00 DB 06 1D 0C F3 00 C7 00 DD 07 A5 0E 4F 01 CF
120 kVp 00 DF 05 FE 0C C5 00 A9 00 E1 07 77 0E 24 01 A4
125 kVp 00 E3 05 DF 0C 96 00 7A 00 E5 07 49 0D F8 01 78
10-6
10-4 Turns Ratio Taps
This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a
look–up–table giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each
valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.
TABLE 10–4
TURNS RATIO TAPS
Relay Tap Selection Address Default Maximum Minimum

No Taps 00 E7 02 66 03 B6 00 96
K1 00 E9 02 34 03 C4 00 A4
K2 00 EB 02 4F 03 DF 00 BF
K2, K1 00 ED 02 7D 04 0D 00 ED
K3 00 EF 02 E6 04 76 01 56
K3, K1 00 F1 03 28 04 B8 01 98
K3, K2 00 F3 03 33 04 C3 01 A3
K3, K2, K1 00 F5 03 62 04 F2 04 D2
K4 00 F7 03 4A 04 DA 01 BA
K4, K1 00 F9 03 7F 05 0F 01 EF
K4, K2 00 FB 03 AC 05 3C 02 1C
K4, K2, K1 00 FD 03 E1 05 71 02 51
K4, K3 00 FF 04 25 05 B5 02 95
K4, K3, K1 01 01 04 65 05 91 02 D5
K4, K3, K2, 01 03 04 76 06 06 02 E6
K4, K3, K2, K1 01 05 04 C3 06 53 03 33
K5 01 07 05 21 06 B1 03 91
K5, K1 01 09 05 17 06 A7 03 87
K5, K2 01 0B 05 39 06 C9 03 A9
K5, K2, K1 01 0D 05 6A 06 FA 03 DA
K5, K3 01 0F 05 9A 07 2A 04 0A
K5, K3, K1 01 11 05 EB 07 7B 04 5B
K5, K3, K2 01 13 06 24 07 B4 04 94
K5, K3, K2, K1 01 15 06 8D 08 1D 04 FD
K6, K3 01 17 06 EA 08 7A 05 5A
K6, K3, K1 01 19 06 F3 08 83 05 63
K6, K3, K2 01 1B 07 23 08 B3 05 93
K6, K3, K2, K1 01 1D 07 AF 09 3F 06 1F
10-7
10-5 System Resistance Taps
This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look–
up–table giving the effective system resistance (battery to x–ray tube) for each valid tap
combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.
TABLE 10–5
SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

No Taps 01 1F 00 D3 01 9B 00 6F
K1 01 21 00 E1 01 A9 00 7D
K2 01 23 00 C7 01 8F 00 64
K2, K1 01 25 00 D0 01 98 00 6C
K3 01 27 01 37 01 FF 00 6F
K3, K1 01 29 01 54 02 1C 00 8C
K3, K2 01 2B 01 27 02 53 00 96
K3, K2, K1 01 2D 01 34 01 FC 00 9E
K4 01 2F 00 D2 01 9A 00 6E
K4, K1 01 31 00 EA 01 B2 00 86
K4, K2 01 33 00 F9 01 C1 00 95
K4, K2, K1 01 35 01 11 01 D9 00 AD
K4, K3 01 37 01 3A 02 02 00 C2
K4, K3, K1 01 39 01 5F 02 27 00 C3
K4, K3, K2, 01 3B 01 51 02 19 00 C5
K4, K3, K2, K1 01 3D 01 8B 02 53 00 C7
K5 01 3F 01 AC 02 74 00 C8
K5, K1 01 41 01 7C 02 44 00 D2
K5, K2 01 43 01 8F 02 57 00 DB
K5, K2, K1 01 45 01 A7 02 6F 00 DF
K5, K3 01 47 01 C1 02 89 00 F9
K5, K3, K1 01 49 01 FF 02 C7 01 37
K5, K3, K2 01 4B 02 23 02 EB 01 5B
K5, K3, K2, K1 01 4D 02 7C 03 44 01 B4
K6, K3 01 4F 02 B3 03 7B 01 C2
K6, K3, K1 01 51 02 9C 03 64 01 C2
K6, K3, K2 01 53 02 B4 03 7C 01 C2
K6, K3, K2, K1 01 55 03 37 03 E7 01 C5
10-8
10-6 Drive Parameters
TABLE 10–6
DRIVE PARAMETERS

DRIVE BYTES
Drive Threshold01 60 0A 14 00
Drive command deadband in DAC counts
around the zero output value.
Drive Equal Value 01 61 0A 14 00

The maximum difference between the left and
right drive output commands in DAC counts
for which the left and right output commands
will be made equal.
Left Output Zero Point 01 62 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive
command.
Left Forward Output Gain 01 63 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the forward direction.
The gain is given by (decimal equivalent)
100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100
100 = gain of 1.
Left Reverse Output Gain 01 64 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the reverse direction.
100 = gain of 1.
Right Output Zero Point 01 65 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive
command.
Right Forward output Gain 01 66 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the forward direction.
100 = gain of 1.
Right Reverse output Gain 01 67 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the reverse direction.
100 = gain of 1.
10-9

DRIVE PARAMETERS

Right Forward Position is Greater 01 68 01 01 00

not change with Data Base Access. Indicates
magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sen-
sor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward
on the right drive handle results in a more posi-
tive transducer voltage than pulling back pro-
duces.
Left Forward Position is Greater 01 69 00 01 00

on the left drive handle results in a more posi-
duces.
Acceleration Factor 01 6A C8 FF 28
Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this
number is the more responsive the unit will be
after the drive handle is calibrated.
Left Minimum Input 01 6B 80 CO 10

not change with Data Base Access. The mini-
mum value from the left handle transducer.
Left Maximum Input 01 6C 80 FO 30

not change with Data Base Access. The maxi-
DRIVE WORDS
Left Input Zero Point 01 6D 08 00 0C 00 05 00
not change with Data Base Access. The num-
ber of A/D counts with no force applied to the
drive handle on the left side.
Left Forward Input Gain 01 6F 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

not change with Data Base Access. The gain
applied to the left input in the forward direction.
1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210
1000 = gain of 0.21.
10-10

DRIVE PARAMETERS

Left Reverse Input Gain 01 71 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

applied to the left input in the reverse direction.
1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Input Zero Point 01 73 08 00 0C 00 05 00

ber of A/D counts with no force is applied to the
drive handle on the right side.
Right Forward Input Gain 01 75 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

applied to the right input in the forward direc-
tion. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent)
1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Reverse Input Gain 01 77 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Minimum Input 01 79 00 80 00 CO 00 10

mum value from the right handle transducer.
Right Maximum Input 01 7B 00 80 00 FO 00 30

10-11
10-7 Charge Parameters
TABLE 10–7
CHARGE PARAMETERS

CHARGE BYTES
EQUALIZATION AMP HR 01 7D AF C8 32
Amount of charge returned to battery before
an equalization cycle is required. (extended
recharge) (not used with PROMS
46–302688G1/46–302687G1).
Maximum High Charge Time 01 7E OF 14 0A

The maximum time in hours that the unit can
charge. If this time is exceeded, an error con-
dition is flagged and trickle charge is entered.
Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage 01 7F 7C 80 75

The maximum long term voltage allowed
during trickle charge.
High Charge High Output 01 80 32 3C 28

not change with Data Base Access. A charge
command DAC count used during charger
calibration.
High Charge Low Output 01 81 19 23 0F

calibration.
Trickle Charge High Output 01 82 C8 E1 AF

command DAC count used during trickle
charge calibration.
Trickle Charge Low Output 01 83 64 7D 4B

charge calibration.
10-12

CHARGE PARAMETERS

Start Timed Charge Counts 01 84 1A* 34* 10*

The DAC count at which the final charge 24** 34** 10**
phase begins.
High Charge Clamp Volts 01 85 82 85 7D

The maximum battery voltage in volts
allowed during charging. Charging current
will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.
* VALUE FOR PROM 46–302688G1/46–302687G1

** VALUE FOR PROM 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
10-13

CHARGE PARAMETERS

EQUALIZATION CLAMP VOLTS 01 86 84 8C 80

The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed
during the charging equalization cycle. (not
used).
EQUALIZATION TIME 01 87 12 40 06
The time to ”equalization complete” when the
switch to the trickle charge rate occurs. (not
used).
FINAL PHASE TIME 01 88 06* 0C* 00*

The time to ”Charge Completed” from the 06** 12** 00**
time the switch to the trickle charge rate
occurs.
* VALUE FOR PROM 46–302688G1/46–302687G1

** VALUE FOR PROM 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
10-14

CHARGE PARAMETERS

CHARGE WORDS
Feedback at High Charge High Output 01 89 09 C4 13 88 04 B0
not change with Data Base Access. The
charge current feedback in VCO pulses ob-
tained during one second with the charge cur-
rent demand set to High Charge High Output
counts. This parameter is used to determine
what the charging current feedback should be
for any given charge current demand DAC
output.
Feedback at High Charge Low Output 01 8B 04 4C 05 DC 02 58

rent demand set to High Charge Low Output
output.
mA at High Charge High Output 01 8D 03 E8 04 E2 02 EE

charging current in milliamps with the charge
current demand DAC set to High Charge High
Output counts. This parameter is calculated
during charger calibration. It is used to deter-
mine what the charging current is for any given
charge current demand DAC output.
mA at High Charge Low Output 01 8F 01 F4 02 EE 00 FA

current demand DAC set to High Charge Low
10-15

CHARGE PARAMETERS

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output 01 91 27 10 61 A8 13 88

rent demand set to Trickle Charge High Out-
put counts in the trickle charge mode. This pa-
rameter is used to determine what the charg-
ing current feedback should be for any given
charge current demand DAC output in the
trickle charge mode.
Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output 01 93 13 88 3A 98 03 E8

rent demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output
counts in the trickle charge mode. This pa-
Maximum Charging mA 01 97 09 C4 0B B8 07 D0
The maximum allowable charging current in
milliamps.
Charge Current Feedback Error 01 99 02 EE 03 E8 01 F4

The error window on the expected charge cur-
rent feedback in VCO pulse counts.
10-16
10-8 Battery Parameters
TABLE 10–8
BATTERY PARAMETERS

BATTERY WORDS
Not used 01 9B
Zero Capacity Change 01 9D 19 19 FF FF 00 00

Maximum change for battery aging.
(Use 0000 to disable battery aging)
Monitor Full Capacity millivolts 01 9F 2D 50* 2E 18* 2C EC*

Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% 2C 88** 2E 18** 2C 24**
capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2D 50
Hex is, decimal 11600 100 = 116.00 V.
Battery Volts Calibration Count 01 A1 8A CC EA 60 4E 20

ber of VCO pulse counts obtained in a five
second period during battery voltage meter
calibration.
Battery Calibration Millivolts 01 A3 2B CA 3A 98 1F 40

not change with Data Base Access. The volt-
age in volts times 100 at the time that Battery
Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. de-
fault of 2BCA Hex is, decimal 11210 100 =
112.10 V.
* VALUE FOR PROM 46–302688G1/46–302687G1

** VALUE FOR PROM 46–303272G1/46–303273G1
10-17
10-9 Field Light Parameters
TABLE 10–9
FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS

FIELD LIGHT BYTES

Field Light on Time 01 A7 1E 2D 05
The time in seconds that the field light will be
on after the field light switch is released.
Maximum Field Light on Time 01 A8 C8 FF 64

The maximum continuous field light operating
time in seconds. Once this time has been ex-
ceeded the field light is turned off and will be
disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds
have expired.
Field Light Cool Time 01 A9 FF FF 64

The cool (off) time in seconds required once
the field light has been on for more than Maxi-
mum Field Light On Time.
Minimum no Cool Time 01 AA 08 0F 04

The time in seconds for which the field light will
be disabled if an operator attempts to light the
field light. This occurs only when field light
heat capacity is approaching maximum limit.
10-18
SECTION 11
DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:
PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1,
46–316685G1/46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1/
46–329188G1, OR 46–329187G2/
46–329188G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974
11-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters
This section contains a complete listing of the AMX–4 Data Base.
TABLE 11–1

X–RAY BYTES
Counts Per mAs00 00 99 C8 64
number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of
X–ray emission.
Battery Recovery Time 00 01 14 1E 0A

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will
be displayed after an exposure. This is the
time it takes the batteries to recover after an
exposure so that technique accuracy can be
guaranteed.
Max Prep to Exposure Time 00 02 1E 28 0A

The maximum time in seconds that the unit
can remain in “prep” before an exit is forced.
Initial Heat Wait Time 00 03 5A 78 3C

The maximum heat wait time in seconds re-
quired after an exposure.
Max Filament Current Change 00 04 0A 10 00

The maximum number of DAC counts the
Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table
Elements can change after most exposures.
Used only during auto calibration.
Leakage Current at 50 kVp 00 05 00 64 00

pensation.
Leakage Current at 80 kVp 00 06 0A C8 00

pensation.
11-1


Leakage Current at 125 kVp 00 07 21 FA 0A

required at 125kVp to give proper leakage
compensation.
Last Calibratible Tap 00 08 12 1B 10

not change with Data Base Access. The index
of the last tap combination that could be cali-
brated during Tap Cal.
Filament Current Calibrated 00 09 FF FF 00

01 indicates filament current tables have been
calibrated. Any other value is false.
kVp Calibrated 00 0A FF FF 00
01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated. Any
Taps Calibrated00 0B 00 FF 00
This value established during calibration, do
01 indicates Taps have been calibrated. Any
X–RAY WORDS
Turn off Delay at 50 kVp 00 0F 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA
not change with Data Base Access. Time in
microseconds between EXP STOP CMND
being given and XRAY ON going low at
50kVp. This time used to determine when to
terminate exposure in order to get selected
mAs.

not change with Data Base Access. Time in
microseconds between EXP STOP CMND
being given and XRAY ON going low at
lected mAs.
11-2



120kVp. This time is used to determine when
to terminate the exposure in order to get the
selected mAs.
Ideal kVp1 Output 00 15 04 C9 05 C3 03 CF

Ideal kVp2 Output 00 17 05 F5 06 EF 04 FB

Ideal kVp3 Output 00 19 08 40 09 33 07 3F

Ideal kVp4 Output 00 1B 0C B2 0D AC 0B BB

Actual kVp1 Output 00 1D 02 08 02 3A 01 D6

Actual kVp2 Output 00 1F 02 80 02 B2 02 4E

11-3


Actual kVp3 Output 00 21 03 52 03 84 03 20

Actual kVp4 Output 00 23 04 BB 04 E2 04 7E

mAs Frequency at 100 mA 00 25 3B 92 4E 20 27 10

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This
value is calculated during mAs calibration.
Locations 27 through 86 are not used.
11-4
11-2 Filament Current Calibration Table
table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is cop-
ied into Table 11–2 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.
TABLE 11–2
FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE
kVp at 90 mA 110 mA
50 kVp 00 87 08 09 0F 64 03 0C 00 89 0A 18 0F FF 04 EC
54 kVp 00 8F 07 E1 0F 37 02 B7 00 91 09 E6 0F FE 04 AA
56 kVp 00 93 07 CD 0F 0C 02 8C 00 95 09 CD 0F DD 04 89
58 kVp 00 97 07 B9 0E E2 02 62 00 99 09 B5 0F BC 04 68
60 kVp 00 9B 07 A5 0E D8 02 4C 00 9D 09 9C 0F 9C 04 4B
62 kVp 00 9F 07 91 0E CC 02 35 00 A1 09 83 0F 7B 04 27
64 kVp 00 A3 07 7D 0E B3 02 15 00 A5 09 6A 0F 64 04 06
66 kVp 00 A7 07 6D 0E 9C 01 F4 00 A9 09 59 0F 5A 03 E5
68 kVp 00 AB 07 5E 0E 90 01 DE 00 AD 09 48 0F 4A 03 C4
70 kVp 00 AF 07 4E 0E 83 01 C7 00 B1 09 37 0F 3E 03 A4
72 kVp 00 B3 07 3E 0E 6D 01 BB 00 B5 09 27 0F 31 03 83
74 kVp 00 B7 07 2E 0E 56 01 AE 00 B9 09 16 0F 1A 03 62
76 kVp 00 BB 07 1F 0E 4A 01 A2 00 BD 09 05 0F 5D 03 41
80 kVp 00 BF 06 FF 0E 31 01 89 00 C1 08 E3 0F 4E 03 00
85 kVp 00 C3 06 D8 0E 0C 01 6E 00 C5 08 B9 0F 40 02 D4
90 kVp 00 C7 06 B9 0D DD 01 53 00 C9 08 8B 0F 29 02 A9
95 kVp 00 CB 06 9A 0D AE 01 38 00 CD 08 5D 0E FD 02 7D
100 kVp 00 CF 06 7B 0D 80 01 1E 00 D1 08 2F 0E D2 02 52
105 kVp 00 D3 06 5B 0D 51 01 03 00 D5 08 01 0E A6 02 26
110 kVp 00 D7 06 3C 0D 22 00 DE 00 D9 07 D3 0E 7B 01 FB
115 kVp 00 DB 06 1D 0C F3 00 C7 00 DD 07 A5 0E 4F 01 CF
120 kVp 00 DF 05 FE 0C C5 00 A9 00 E1 07 77 0E 24 01 A4
125 kVp 00 E3 05 DF 0C 96 00 7A 00 E5 07 49 0D F8 01 78
11-5
11-3 Turns Ratio Taps
This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a
look–up–table giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each
valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.
TABLE 11–3
TURNS RATIO TAPS

No Taps 00 E7 02 66 03 B6 00 96
K1 00 E9 02 34 03 C4 00 A4
K2 00 EB 02 4F 03 DF 00 BF
K2, K1 00 ED 02 7D 04 0D 00 ED
K3 00 EF 02 E6 04 76 01 56
K3, K1 00 F1 03 28 04 B8 01 98
K3, K2 00 F3 03 33 04 C3 01 A3
K3, K2, K1 00 F5 03 62 04 F2 04 D2
K4 00 F7 03 4A 04 DA 01 BA
K4, K1 00 F9 03 7F 05 0F 01 EF
K4, K2 00 FB 03 AC 05 3C 02 1C
K4, K2, K1 00 FD 03 E1 05 71 02 51
K4, K3 00 FF 04 25 05 B5 02 95
K4, K3, K1 01 01 04 65 05 91 02 D5
K4, K3, K2, 01 03 04 76 06 06 02 E6
K4, K3, K2, K1 01 05 04 C3 06 53 03 33
K5 01 07 05 21 06 B1 03 91
K5, K1 01 09 05 17 06 A7 03 87
K5, K2 01 0B 05 39 06 C9 03 A9
K5, K2, K1 01 0D 05 6A 06 FA 03 DA
K5, K3 01 0F 05 9A 07 2A 04 0A
K5, K3, K1 01 11 05 EB 07 7B 04 5B
K5, K3, K2 01 13 06 24 07 B4 04 94
K5, K3, K2, K1 01 15 06 8D 08 1D 04 FD
K6, K3 01 17 06 EA 08 7A 05 5A
K6, K3, K1 01 19 06 F3 08 83 05 63
K6, K3, K2 01 1B 07 23 08 B3 05 93
K6, K3, K2, K1 01 1D 07 AF 09 3F 06 1F
11-6
11-4 System Resistance Taps
This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look–
up–table giving the effective system resistance (battery to x–ray tube) for each valid tap
combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.
TABLE 11–4
SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

No Taps 01 1F 00 D3 01 9B 00 6F
K1 01 21 00 E1 01 A9 00 7D
K2 01 23 00 C7 01 8F 00 64
K2, K1 01 25 00 D0 01 98 00 6C
K3 01 27 01 37 01 FF 00 6F
K3, K1 01 29 01 54 02 1C 00 8C
K3, K2 01 2B 01 27 02 53 00 96
K3, K2, K1 01 2D 01 34 01 FC 00 9E
K4 01 2F 00 D2 01 9A 00 6E
K4, K1 01 31 00 EA 01 B2 00 86
K4, K2 01 33 00 F9 01 C1 00 95
K4, K2, K1 01 35 01 11 01 D9 00 AD
K4, K3 01 37 01 3A 02 02 00 C2
K4, K3, K1 01 39 01 5F 02 27 00 C3
K4, K3, K2, 01 3B 01 51 02 19 00 C5
K4, K3, K2, K1 01 3D 01 8B 02 53 00 C7
K5 01 3F 01 AC 02 74 00 C8
K5, K1 01 41 01 7C 02 44 00 D2
K5, K2 01 43 01 8F 02 57 00 DB
K5, K2, K1 01 45 01 A7 02 6F 00 DF
K5, K3 01 47 01 C1 02 89 00 F9
K5, K3, K1 01 49 01 FF 02 C7 01 37
K5, K3, K2 01 4B 02 23 02 EB 01 5B
K5, K3, K2, K1 01 4D 02 7C 03 44 01 B4
K6, K3 01 4F 02 B3 03 7B 01 C2
K6, K3, K1 01 51 02 9C 03 64 01 C2
K6, K3, K2 01 53 02 B4 03 7C 01 C2
K6, K3, K2, K1 01 55 03 37 03 E7 01 C5
11-7
11-5 Drive Parameters
TABLE 11–5
DRIVE PARAMETERS

DRIVE BYTES
Drive Threshold01 60 0A 14 00
Drive command deadband in DAC counts
around the zero output value.
Drive Equal Value 01 61 0A 14 00

The maximum difference between the left and
right drive output commands in DAC counts
for which the left and right output commands
will be made equal.
Left Output Zero Point 01 62 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive
command.
Left Forward Output Gain 01 63 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the forward direction.
100 = gain of 1.
Left Reverse Output Gain 01 64 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the reverse direction.
100 = gain of 1.
Right Output Zero Point 01 65 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive
command.
Right Forward output Gain 01 66 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the forward direction.
100 = gain of 1.
Right Reverse output Gain 01 67 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the reverse direction.
100 = gain of 1.
11-8

DRIVE PARAMETERS

Right Forward Position is Greater 01 68 01 01 00

on the right drive handle results in a more posi-
duces.
Left Forward Position is Greater 01 69 00 01 00

on the left drive handle results in a more posi-
duces.
Acceleration Factor 01 6A C8 FF 28
Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this
number is the more responsive the unit will be
after the drive handle is calibrated.
Left Minimum Input 01 6B 80 CO 10

Left Maximum Input 01 6C 80 FO 30

DRIVE WORDS
Left Input Zero Point 01 6D 08 00 0C 00 05 00
ber of A/D counts with no force applied to the
drive handle on the left side.
Left Forward Input Gain 01 6F 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

applied to the left input in the forward direction.
1000 = gain of 0.21.
11-9

DRIVE PARAMETERS

Left Reverse Input Gain 01 71 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Input Zero Point 01 73 08 00 0C 00 05 00

ber of A/D counts with no force is applied to the
drive handle on the right side.
Right Forward Input Gain 01 75 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

applied to the right input in the forward direc-
tion. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent)
1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Reverse Input Gain 01 77 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Minimum Input 01 79 00 80 00 CO 00 10

Right Maximum Input 01 7B 00 80 00 FO 00 30

11-10
11-6 Charge Parameters
TABLE 11–6
CHARGE PARAMETERS

CHARGE BYTES
TOP OFF TIME 01 7D AF* C8* 32*
Additional charge time in minutes that the 2E** FF** 00**
system will charge after switching to trickle
mode. This is the absolute minimum time
to “Charge Complete.” (Not used with PROMS
46–303815G1/46–303816G1.)
Maximum High Charge Time 01 7E OF 14 0A

The maximum time in hours that the unit can
charge. If this time is exceeded, an error con-
dition is flagged and trickle charge is entered.
Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage 01 7F 7C 80 75

The maximum long term voltage allowed
during trickle charge.
High Charge High Output 01 80 32 3C 28

calibration.
High Charge Low Output 01 81 19 23 0F

calibration.
Trickle Charge High Output 01 82 C8 E1 AF

charge calibration.
Trickle Charge Low Output 01 83 64 7D 4B

charge calibration
* Values for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1

** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and
46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2
11-11

CHARGE PARAMETERS

Start Timed Charge Counts 01 84 24* 34* 10*

The DAC count at which the final charge 1A** 34** 10**
phase begins. 1A*** 34*** 10***
High Charge Clamp Volts 01 85 82* 85* 7D*

The maximum battery voltage in volts 7F** 85** 7D**
allowed during charging. Charging current 82*** 87*** 7D***
will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.
FINAL PHASE TIME 01 88 06 12 00

The time to “Charge Completed” from the
time the switch to the trickle charge rate
occurs.

** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1
*** Values for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1
or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2
11-12

CHARGE PARAMETERS

CHARGE WORDS
Feedback at High Charge High Output 01 89 09 C4 13 88 04 B0
rent demand set to High Charge High Output
output.
Feedback at High Charge Low Output 01 8B 04 4C 05 DC 02 58

rent demand set to High Charge Low Output
output
mA at High Charge High Output 01 8D 03 E8 04 E2 02 EE

current demand DAC set to High Charge High
mA at High Charge Low Output 01 8F 01 F4 02 EE 00 FA

current demand DAC set to High Charge Low
11-13

CHARGE PARAMETERS

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output 01 91 27 10 61 A8 13 88

rent demand set to Trickle Charge High Out-
put counts in the trickle charge mode. This pa-
Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output 01 93 13 88 3A 98 03 E8

rent demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output
counts in the trickle charge mode. This pa-
Maximum Charging mA 01 97 09 C4 0B B8 07 D0
The maximum allowable charging current in
milliamps.
Charge Current Feedback Error 01 99 02 EE 03 E8 01 F4

The error window on the expected charge cur-
rent feedback in VCO pulse count.
11-14

46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or
46–316685G1/46–316686G1
TABLE 11–7
BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

BATTERY WORDS
TRICKLE LMT 01 9B 14 14* FF FF* 00 00*
The number of charge cutoff cycles run 09 09** FF FF** 00 00**
before a complete charge is allowed. Both
lower and upper bytes must be the same.
Battery Aging Disable 01 9D 19 19* FF FF* 00 00*

Enter 0000 to disable battery aging com- 00 00** FF FF** 00 00**
pensation.
Monitor Full Capacity millivolts 01 9F 2C 88 2E 18 2C 24

Battery voltage which corresponds to 100%
capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C 88
Hex is, decimal 11400 100 = 114.00 V.

calibration.

fault of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 =
112.10 V.
Breaker Trip Time 01 A5 03 03 FF FF 00 00

The number of hours before breaker trips for
certain charger failures.

** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1
11-15

46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR
46–329187G2/46–329188G2
TABLE 11–8
BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

BATTERY WORDS
TRICKLE LMT 01 9B 09 09 FF FF 00 00
The number of charge cutoff cycles run
before a complete charge is allowed. Both
lower and upper bytes must be the same.
Battery Aging Disable 01 9D 19 19 FF FF 00 00

Enter 0000 to disable battery aging com-
pensation.
Monitor Full Capacity millivolts 01 9F 2C EC 2E 18 2C 24

Battery voltage which corresponds to 100%
capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C EC Hex
is, decimal 11500 100 = 115.00 V.

calibration.

fault of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 =
112.10 V.
Breaker Trip Time 01 A5 03 03 FF FF 00 00

The number of hours before breaker trips for
certain charger failures.
11-16

BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

Total Capacity 01A7 1964 2328 03E8

Indicates the total capacity available over the
range of the capacity bar graph in mAHR.
Idle Load Current 01A9 012C 03E8 0032

Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on
the batteries in the idle mode.
Drive Load Current 01AB 0BB8 2710 01F4

the batteries in the drive mode.
Field Light Load Current 01AD 09C4 1B58 01F4

the batteries when the field light is on.
Prep Load Current 01AF 0BB8 1B58 01F4

Indicates the level of non–exposure load current
(in milliamps) on the batteries in the x–ray mode.
Nominal 0% Capacity Millivolts 01B1 2BC0 2C88 2AF8

Sets the nominal 0% capacity battery voltage (in
tens of millivolts).
Full Charge Excess Capacity 01B3 01F4 03E8 0000

Indicates the amount of extra capacity (in mAHR)
available at “CHARGE COMPLETE”.
11-17

46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or
46–316685G1/46–316686G1
TABLE 11–9
FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

FIELD LIGHT BYTES

Field Light On–Time 01 A7 1E 2D 05
Maximum Field Light On–Time 01 A8 C8 FF 64

have expired.
Field Light Cool Time 01 A9 FF FF 64

Minimum no Cool Time 01 AA 08 0F 04

11-18

46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR
46–329187G2/46–329188G2
TABLE 11–10
FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

FIELD LIGHT BYTES

Field Light On–Time 01 BB 1E 2D 05
Maximum Field Light On–Time 01 BC C8 FF 64

have expired.
Field Light Cool Time 01 BD FF FF 64

Minimum no Cool Time 01 BE 08 0F 04

11-19
11-11 Auto Cal Filament Table
table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.
TABLE 11–11
AUTO CAL FILAMENT TABLE
kVp at 90 mA 110 mA
50 kVp 0C 2D 08 09 0F 64 03 0C 0C 2F 0A 18 0F FF 04 EC
52 kVp 0C 31 07 F5 0F 61 02 E1 0C 33 09 FF 0F FF 04 CB
54 kVp 0C 35 07 E1 0F 37 02 B7 0C 37 09 E6 0F FE 04 AA
56 kVp 0C 39 07 CD 0F 0C 02 8C 0C 3B 09 CD 0F DD 04 89
58 kVp 0C 3D 07 B9 0E E2 02 62 0C 3F 09 B5 0F BC 04 68
60 kVp 0C 41 07 A5 0E D8 02 4C 0C 43 09 9C 0F 9C 04 4B
62 kVp 0C 45 07 91 0E CC 02 35 0C 47 09 83 0F 7B 04 27
64 kVp 0C 49 07 7D 0E B3 02 15 0C 4B 09 6A 0F 64 04 06
66 kVp 0C 4D 07 6D 0E 9C 01 F4 0C 4F 09 59 0F 5A 03 E5
68 kVp 0C 51 07 5E 0E 90 01 DE 0C 53 09 48 0F 4A 03 C4
70 kVp 0C 55 07 4E 0E 83 01 C7 0C 57 09 37 0F 3E 03 A4
72 kVp 0C 59 07 3E 0E 6D 01 BB 0C 5B 09 27 0F 31 03 83
74 kVp 0C 5D 07 2E 0E 56 01 AE 0C 5F 09 16 0F 1A 03 62
76 kVp 0C 61 07 1F 0E 4A 01 A2 0C 63 09 05 0F 5D 03 41
80 kVp 0C 65 06 FF 0E 31 01 89 0C 67 08 E3 0F 4E 03 00
85 kVp 0C 69 06 D8 0E 0C 01 6E 0C 6B 08 B9 0F 40 02 D4
90 kVp 0C 6D 06 B9 0D DD 01 53 0C 6F 08 8B 0F 29 02 A9
95 kVp 0C 71 06 9A 0D AE 01 38 0C 73 08 5D 0E FD 02 7D
100 kVp 0C 75 06 7B 0D 80 01 1E 0C 77 08 2F 0E D2 02 52
105 kVp 0C 79 06 5B 0D 51 01 03 0C 7B 08 01 0E A6 02 26
110 kVp 0C 7D 06 3C 0D 22 00 DE 0C 7F 07 D3 0E 7B 01 FB
115 kVp 0C 81 06 1D 0C F3 00 C7 0C 83 07 A5 0E 4F 01 CF
120 kVp 0C 85 05 FE 0C C5 00 A9 0C 87 07 77 0E 24 01 A4
125 kVp 0C 89 05 DF 0C 96 00 7A 0C 8B 07 49 0D F8 01 78
11-20
11-12 Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS

46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or
46–316685G1/46–316686G1
TABLE 11–12
MONITOR ZERO CAPACITY MILLIVOLTS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts 0C 8D 2B C0 2C 88 2B C0

Battery voltages which correspond to 0% ca-
pacity times 100. i.e. default of 2B C0. Hex is
decimal. 11200 100 = 112.00V.
11-21
11-13 Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS

46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR
46–329187G2/46–329188G2
TABLE 11–13
BATTERY AGING CAPACITY OFFSET FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

Battery Aging Capacity Offset 0C 8D 00 00 FF FF 00 00

Offsets to total capacity in mA–HR. When this
value is non–zero, it has the effect of reducing
the amount of capacity available over the
range of the capacity display.
11-22
SECTION 12
ERROR CODES
12-1 Introduction
This section contains error prompt listings, the probable cause, and recommended acĆ
tions to correct the problem.
The error listings are organized into three categories, Power Up Errors, Calibration
Errors, and Applications Errors. Error prompts are listed in alphanumeric order
within these three categories.
Software detected errors are divided into three categories:
1. Software errors like Battery Error 4 and Check Sum Err 1. These involve calcuĆ
lations and parameter passing.
2. Data errors like Cal Charger Err 3. These are the result of comparing calibration
values in RAM with allowed maximum or minimum values stored in PROM.
3. Hardware errors like Battery Error 1. These are the result of an error bit set durĆ
ing a read; or comparing a calibration port value with the allowed maximum or
minimum value stored in PROM.
12-2 Applications Error Handling Overview
When an applications runĆtime error occurs, the status signal which leads to the error
is checked again to make sure that it wasn't a noise glitch that caused it. If the recheck
indicates no problem, a glitch is assumed and the original error is ignored. When the
recheck yields the error again, a fault is assumed and appropriate action is taken. This
involves both displaying an error code and message, and logging the error code in a
circular error buffer and adding it to a histogram of errors. If a fault is found during
application code processing, the error code is displayed along with an appropriate erĆ
ror message. A fault will not necessarily bring down the whole system, it will only inĆ
hibit the applicable function. For example, a drive mode fault will inhibit drive, an xĆ
ray mode fault will inhibit xĆray, and a charge fault will inhibit charging. The exception
to this is the Watchdog timeĆout error which disables all functions and places the procĆ
essor in a powerĆdown state.
12-3 Circular Error Buffer
This is a 256 Byte buffer in non-volatile RAM where error codes are stored in the
order in which they occur. The most recent 256 error codes are kept. Any previous erĆ
ror codes are lost.
12-4 Histogram Of Errors
This buffer, also in non-volatile RAM, keeps a history of the number of times each
error has occurred. The error code count stops at 255, after which, any additional erĆ
rors are ignored by this buffer.
12-1
TABLE 12–1
POWER UP ERROR CODES
Error Number Probable Cause Recommended Action
No Response Microprocessor operation verification test. If the Check microprocessor and EPROM if failure
displays do not turn on, check the diagnostic LED occurs.
array on the processor board. If all LEDs are on, the
processor is not executing the test. If all LEDs are off,
the test failed.
This test assumes that the power supplies are working
correctly.
TEST – 01 FAILED EPROM Check Sum is calculated and compared with Check EPROM and microprocessor if failure
EPROM Check Sum stored value. Error Code 81 Hex is recorded in the occurs.
Error Log for a failure.
TEST – 02 FAILED The first write to the RAM will not be stored if the RAM Check RAM and it’s associated circuitry. Check
RAM Battery Test battery is below 2.0 volts. The processor writes to the microprocessor.
RAM then reads the location. An error occurs if the
value written is not the same as the value read. Error
Code 82 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.
TEST – 03 FAILED Preserves data form bottom of RAM to top of Data Check RAM and it’s associated circuitry. Make
Auxiliary RAM Test Base. Does not preserve data above top of Data Base. sure RAM is in the correct socket.
Error Code 83 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a Check the microprocessor.
failure.
Check the option switch, S96 on CPU
46–232828 or S75 on CPU 46–264974, to see
that ram is selected. Option switch 1 must be in
the on (closed) position. Closed = 2k of RAM,
open = 4k of RAM.
TEST – 04 FAILED Calculates the Check Sum for the Calibration Data Check Calibration and RAM.
Calibration Data Base Check Base and compares it with the stored value. Test fails
Sum if they are not equal. Entering Calibration will give a
more specific error code for the check sum failure.
Error Code 84 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a
failure.
TEST – 05 FAILED Write to timer and read back several times. Test fails if Check HC123 one shot and associated circuitry.
Watchdog Timer timer is high for more than 75 milliseconds or less than
25 milliseconds. Error Code 85 Hex is recorded in the
Error Log for a failure.
TEST – 06 FAILED Timer 1 can not be checked because the program Check 82C54 timer, HC151 8 to 1 MUX,
Programmable Interval Timer 0 does not have direct control of it’s input gate. Initialize oscillator, and all associated circuitry.
and 2 timer 0 for 16 kHz and timer 2 for 120 kHz. Count
pulses to verify frequency. Check output 2 for 50%
duty cycle. Error Code 86 Hex is recorded in the Error
Log for a failure.
TEST – 07 FAILED Read +5 volt power supply. Test fails if result is below Check +5 volt supply, AD574A A/D Converter,
Analog to Digital Converter Test +4.5 volts or above +5.5 volts. Error Code 87 Hex is LF398 sample and hold, AD7506 16 to 1 MUX,
recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Also tests +24V HC374 latch, and all associated circuitry.
and 15 supplies if option switch is set to do so.
(+24V and 15V supply test only with firmware
46–302688G1/ 46–302687G1 and later on CPU
46–264974. Test enabled by dip switch #3.)
12-2
TABLE 12–2
CALIBRATION ERROR CODES
–CALDAT WARNING– Something is out of limits. A maximum or minimum

value was inserted so that calibration can continue.
Continue calibrating and watch for maximum or
minimum limit errors.
BATTERY ERROR 1 Counter overflowed while determining battery voltage. Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be less
than 10 kHz.
Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be
operating properly.
BATTERY ERROR 2 Reading battery voltage indicated less than 80 volts. Battery voltage must be properly calibrated.
Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
BATTERY ERROR 3 Reading battery voltage indicated more than 150 volts. Battery voltage must be properly calibrated.
Check VCO.
Check Charger board.
BATTERY ERROR 4 Voltage value was not saved. An invalid condition was Repeat the test or calibration procedure that
detected. Could not determine if battery voltage was a caused the error.
loaded or unloaded value. Replace PROM if problem continues.
BATRY WORD LIMIT Data for either upper of lower battery calibration limit Calibrate volt meter.
has been exceeded. Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be from
55 to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery
voltage of 115.0 volts should produce a
frequency of 6.3 to 8.6 kHz.
CAL CHGR ERR 1 Hardware counter overflowed while determining Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be less
charging current. than 60 kHz.
Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be
operating properly.
CAL CHGR ERR 2 Reading battery current port indicated charge current Check connection between CPU and Charger
frequency was missing. boards.
Check for Digital to Analog Converter output at
least 0.5 volts at TP–29 on the CPU Board
Does charger charge? Does charge voltage
develop across charging resistor AMX1 A3 R1?
12-3

CAL CHGR ERR 3 Either upper or lower charger calibration limit has been Calibrate charger.
exceeded. Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
Does CHARGE SCALE–SELECT signal change
state during charger calibration?
During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog
Converter output voltage at TP–29 on the CPU
Board should be:
For the first conversion
0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE
SCALE–SELECT is not asserted.
For the second conversion
SCALE–SELECT is not asserted.
For the third conversion
SCALE–SELECT is asserted.
For the fourth conversion
SCALE–SELECT is asserted.
The average frequency at Charger board TP–6
should be:
1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when
CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted
18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when
CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted
CAL TAP ERROR 1 The proper mA could not be reached by changing the Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.
kVp. Check mAs Calibration.
Check for bad connections in the
X–ray generator.
CAL TAP ERROR 2 More than 140 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap Repeat the Tap CAL Procedure.
selection that should provide less than 140 kVp. Check mAs Calibration.
Calibrate kVp.
Check generator tap relay wiring.
CAL TAP ERROR 3 More than 35 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap Charge if battery voltage is less than 112 volts.
selection that should provide 35 kVp. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.
Check mAs Calibration.
Calibrate kVp.
CAL TAP ERROR 4 A high order tap combination produced less kVp then Check generator tap relay wiring.
a low order tap combination. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.
12-4

CAL TAP ERROR 5 Even With the filament current digital to analog Check mAs Calibration.
converter at full count, not enough emission current Check filament current by checking voltage across
could be produced. Filament and kVp control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2
R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1
volt per amp of filament current.
Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.
CAL TAP ERROR 6 Even with the filament current digital to analog Check filament current by checking voltage across
converter at its lowest value, the emission current Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2
was too high. R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1
volt per amp of filament current.
Repeat the Tap Calibration
Check mAs Calibration.
CAL TAP ERROR 7 One or more of the tap calibration parameters was Either upper or lower limit of filament current
out of limits, data exceeded either upper or lower calibration points has been exceeded.
limit value of selected tap.
CAL TUBE ERR 1 This error always occurs after a limit error. Refer to the limit error description for additional
information.
CAL TUBE ERR 3 One or more of the Filament current table data field This error always occurs after a limit error. Refer to
limits was exceeded. the limit error description for additional information.
CHARG BYTE LIMIT Reading battery charger port indicated either upper Calibrate charger.
or lower calibration limit exceeded.
CHARG WORD LIMIT Battery charger upper or lower calibration limit Calibrate charger.
exceeded. Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
Does CHARGE SCALE–SELECT signal change
state during charger calibration?
During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog
Converter output voltage at TP–29 on the CPU Board
should be:
For the first conversion
0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is
not asserted.
For the second conversion
not asserted.
For the third conversion
asserted.
For the fourth conversion
asserted.
The average frequency at Charger board TP–6
should be:
1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when
CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted.
18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when
CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted.
12-5

CHECK SUM ERR 1 Drive calibration bytes check sum failed. Recalibrate drive.
CHECK SUM ERR 2 Drive calibration words check sum failed. Recalibrate drive.
CHECK SUM ERR 3 Charger calibration bytes check sum failed. Recalibrate charger.
CHECK SUM ERR 4 Charger calibration words check sum failed. Recalibrate charger.
CHECK SUM ERR 5 Battery calibration words check sum failed. Calibrate voltmeter and generator.
CHECK SUM ERR 6 X–Ray calibration bytes check sum failed. Calibrate generator.
CHECK SUM ERR 7 X–Ray calibration words check sum failed. Calibrate generator.
CHECK SUM ERR 8 Field light calibration bytes check sum failed. Calibrate field light.
CHECK SUM ERR 9 Turns ratio calibration check sum failed. Calibrate generator.
CHECK SUM ERR 10 X–Ray circuit resistance calibration check sum failed. Calibrate generator.
CHECK SUM ERR 11 Filament current tables have a check sum error, or If no other generator checksums are present,
were not calibrated. Calibrate Filament Current.
DRIVE BYTE LIMIT Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded. Calibrate drive.
Check wiring to drive handle transducers.
Check for +10 volts at transducer input.
Does transducer output change when handle is
moved?
Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts?
Check the ”Handle Check*” circuitry, AMX1 A2A1
shell 4–F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V+/–1% during
Handle Calibration.
DRIVE WORD LIMIT Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded. Calibrate drive.
moved?
Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts?
Check the ”Handle Check *” circuitry AMX1 A2A1
shell 4–F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V +/–1% during
Handle Calibration.
FLDLIT TIME LIMT An invalid time was entered during field light Calibrate field light.
calibration.
FLDLT BYTE LIMIT Reading field light data indicated either upper or lower Calibrate field light.
time limit was exceeded.
12-6

HIGH FIL LIMIT One or more of the filament current calibration data IGNORE IF:
parameters exceed the limit. The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a
new battery backed RAM.
The message did not occur during filament current
calibration.
OTHERWISE:
Calibrate mAs.
Check filament current by checking voltage across
Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4
A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F–9). Voltage should be
about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament
current.
Check x–ray tube
Check filament transformer
HNDL CAL ERR 1 Drive handle zero point value was out–of–range. Calibrate drive.
Is transducer output between 2.5 and 7.5 volts?
moved?
Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/– 1% during Handle
Calibration
HNDL CAL ERR 2 Calculated forward gain was out of range. Calibrate drive.
moved?
Calibration.
HNDL CAL ERR 3 Calculated reverse gain was out of range. Calibrate drive.
moved?
Calibration.
HANDLE CAL ERR 4 Drive handle calibration indicated improper polarity Was the handle moved in the correct direction in
relationship between zero, forward, and reverse response to prompts?
calibration voltages. Calibrate drive.
Calibration
KVP CAL ERROR 1 The required kVp and mA can not be reached. Tap Calibrate mAs.
combinations do not go high enough. Is battery voltage drop excessive: See Section 14-1.
Are tap relays functioning properly?
KVP CAL ERROR 2 No tap relays pulled in and the required kVp and mA Are tap relays functioning properly? Check the High
cannot be reached. Voltage Cables for shorts. Calibrate mAs.
12-7

KVP CAL ERROR 4 One or more of the calibration parameters is out of Were kVp values entered correctly?
limits. Is bleeder properly calibrated?
Are all tap relays functioning properly?
LOW FIL LIMIT One or more of the filament current calibration data IGNORE IF:
parameters is less than the minimum allowed. The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a
new battery backed RAM.
The message did not occur during filament current
calibration.
OTHERWISE:
Calibrate mAs.
Check filament current by checking voltage across
Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4
A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F–9). Voltage should be
about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament
current.
Check x–ray tube.
Check filament transformer.
MAS CAL ERROR 1 The frequency produced by injecting 100 mA during Was the injected current more than 110 mA?
mAs meter calibration was to high causing the Is the frequency at Filament and kVp Control board
counter to overflow. TP–2 more than 18 kHz?
MAS CAL ERROR 4 The check to see if data base parameters are being Check data bus connection on CPU board.
written correctly produced an error. Check battery backed RAM.
RAM READBACK ERR Data read from memory location is not what was
written to that location.
SYS RESIST LIMIT The slope of emission current vs kVp was calculated Is mAs properly calibrated?
to be either too flat or too steep at the last tap Is kVp properly calibrated?
selection. This error is valid only during tap
calibration. Check the batteries for excessive voltage drop. See
Section 14-1.
TURN RATIO LIMIT The battery voltage to kVp multiplication factor Is mAs properly calibrated?
(effective turns ratio) was out of range for the last tap Is kVp properly calibrated?
selected.
Check batteries for excessive voltage drop. See
Section 14-1.
VOLTMETER ERR 1 Battery voltage frequency is too high causing the Is the frequency at Charger board TP–6 more than
counter to overflow. 10 kHz?
Is multiplexer AMX1 A3 A1 U76 on Charger Board
functioning properly?
VOLTMETER ERR 4 One or more of the battery voltage calibration data Calibrate voltmeter.
base parameters is out of range. Check connection between CPU and Charger
boards.
Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be from 55
to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery voltage of
115.0 volts should produce a frequency of 6.3 to 8.6
kHz.
12-8

X–RAY BYTE LIMIT One or more of the x–ray calibration parameters just DURING MAS CALIBRATION:
adjusted are out of range. Was correct mA value entered?
Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp
boards.
Frequency at Filament and kVp Board TP–2 must
be between 14 and 18 kHz.
Is your mA meter working properly?
DURING TAP CALIBRATION:
Indicates not enough taps could be calibrated
without exceeding the maximum allowable kVp.
Is kVp calibration correct?
is mAs calibration correct?
Is battery voltage more than 117 volts?
X–RAY WORD LIMIT One or more of the x–ray calibration parameters just DURING MAS CALIBRATION:
adjusted is out of limits. Was correct mA value entered?
Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp
boards.
Frequency at CPU Board TP–2 must be between 14
and 18 kHz.
Is your mA meter working properly?
DURING KVP CALIBRATION:
Were kVp values entered correctly?
Is the bleeder properly calibrated?
Are all tap relays functioning properly?
DURING FILAMENT TABLE CALIBRATION:
Indicates that the turn off delay, the time from the
stop command being asserted to X–RAY ON going
away is greater than 2.0 ms.
Is the kVp calibration jumper removed?
12-9
TABLE 12–3
APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES
ERROR 12 Left stall signal was detected. Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds,
Left Drive Stall etc.)
Release Handle Check snubbers on motor relays.
Check brakes.
Check motors.
Code 12 Hex in the error list.
ERROR 19 Invalid drive command feedback was detected. The message is normal if the unit was being driven fast
Release Handle down an incline, the wheels left the ground, or occasionally
while positioning with the tube not parked. Infrequent
occurrences are not a problem!
Check drive fuses (3).
Check to see that connectors are in place in the drive
module.
Check drive relays.
Code 19 in the error list.
ERROR 13 Right stall signal was detected. Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds,
Right Drive Stall etc.)
Release Handle Check snubbers on motor relays.
Check brakes.
Check motors.
ERROR 44 Battery voltage was higher than expected during If the unit just came off of a charge cycle, the surface
Battery too High prep. charge must be bled off of the batteries. (15 to 20 minute
Voltage Recovery is wait) Driving the unit, turning on the field light, or repeatedly
Required prepping the unit will reduce the wait. This message is
dependent on technique. Lower techniques can be used at
high battery voltage.
ERROR 45 Battery voltage was lower than expected during Code 45 Hex in the error list.
Battery too Low prep. A battery charge cycle may be required if the bar graph
Charge Required shows low capacity.
Check batteries if bar graph shows significant charge
remaining. See Section 14-1.
ERROR 23 The DISPLAY OK status signal was low Check DISPLAY OK signal of the On Board Status port on
Display Error indicating the display controller malfunctioned, or sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic.
there was faulty feedback. Check connection from CPU to display controller.
Check display controller.
Error Code 23 Hex in the error list.
ERROR 70 Watch dog timer shut the system down. Does the unit pass power-up tests?
Halting Error Check the watchdog U137 on CPU 46–232828 or U65 on
46–264974 and associated components.
Is there excessive noise somewhere that may cause the
CPU to get lost.
Are there glitches on CPU reset line?
Error Code 70 Hex in the Error List.
12-10

ERROR 101 Charging current feedback value was high during Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the
Charge Fault high current charging. Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of
the CPU schematic.
Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly?
Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on CPU
46–264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning
properly?
Was there a very large step change in line voltage?
ERROR 102 Charging current feedback value was low during Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the
Charge Fault high current charging. Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of
the CPU schematic.
properly?
Was there a very large drop in line voltage?
Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just
charged? The charger may saturate faster than the
firmware can compensate in this case.
Were locks or extraneous loads left on?
ERROR 103 Charging current feedback value was high during Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port
Charge Fault trickle charge. on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic.
properly?
Was there a very large change in line voltage?
ERROR 104 Charging current feedback value was low during Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger
Charge Fault trickle charge. and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU
schematic.
Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on
properly?
Was there a very large drop in line voltage?
Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just
charged? The charger may saturate faster than the
firmware can compensate in this case.
12-11

ERROR 105 The charger has been operating at full charger Was the unit calibrated properly?
Charge Fault output for more than 15 hours. Is the line voltage low?
Was the battery voltage below 110 volts before the charge
was initiated?
Were the batteries discharged to less than 108 volts? If so a
few charge and run cycles may be needed to rejuvenate
them.
ERROR 106 Charge current feedback value was zero. Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port
Charge Fault on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic.
If a voltage is developed across AMX1-A3-R1 when the unit
is first plugged in, the feedback circuitry is defective,
otherwise look for a faulty connection or a charge board
failure.
ERROR 107 Charge clamp voltage was exceeded at zero Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger
Charge Fault charge current demand. and Drive Control port on sheet 4 Location D 8 of the CPU
schematic.
Does the charge command reach the charge board
correctly?
ERROR 210 Left stall feedback circuitry is defective. A stall is Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU.
Drive Fault indicated after the drive board has been reset. Error Code 10 Hex in the error list.
ERROR 211 Right stall feedback circuitry is defective A stall is Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU.
Drive Fault indicated after the drive boardhas been reset. Error Code 11 Hex in the error list.
ERROR 214 Left drive current feedback from the drive control Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control
Drive Fault was higher than the command from the CPU board.
board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU.
Check drive module fuses.
Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board.
Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in
place.
ERROR 215 Left drive current feedback from the drive control Check current from the CPU board to the drive control
Drive Fault was lower than the command from the CPU board.
board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU.
place.
12-12

ERROR 216 Right drive current feedback from the drive Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control
Drive Fault control was higher than the command fromthe board.
CPU board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU.
place.
ERROR 217 Right drive current feedback from the drive Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control
Drive Fault control was lower than the command from the board.
CPU board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU.
place.
ERROR 218 One or both handle signals were out of range. Calibrate the handle if the error occurs when the handle is
Drive Fault This indicates a potential circuit problem. pushed all the way forward or pulled all the way back. Make
sure that the handle is pushed all the way forward to the
stop and pulled all the way back to the stop during
calibration.
Check connectors and wiring to the drive handle
transducers.
Check the feedback buffers on the CPU.
TP-15 on CPU should be +10 volts.
Check that the +10V supply from the CPU to the
transducers is intact.
Check the data acquisition circuitry; analog MUX, sample
and hold, and Analog to Digital converter.
ERROR 320 The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed when Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the
Generator Fault attempting to light field lamp. Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU
schematic.
Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal does not go “high”
when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ
INV RELAY must both be asserted)
Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86
FET’s case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should
be greater than 2 megohm.
Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller
Board.
Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board.
12-13

ERROR 321 The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed after the field Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the
Generator Fault lamp was turned on. Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU
schematic.
Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal goes “low” after the
60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ INV
RELAY must both be asserted).
Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86
FET’s case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should
be greater than 2 megohm.
Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller
Board.
Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board.
ERROR 322 Battery voltage is less than 90 volts. Feedback Check signals of the Charger and Drive Control port on
Battery Fault circuit is probably defective. sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check CPU connection to the charger board.
If battery voltage when measured with a DVM indicates
voltage is truly below 90V, the batteries should be replaced.
Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz
per battery volt.
ERROR 326 Battery voltage went above 150 volts indicating a Check BAT & CHARGE CUR SEL signals of the Charger
Battery Fault probable feedback circuit fault. and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU
schematic.
Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz
per battery volt.
ERROR 42F A fault occurred with the auto calibration data Recalibration is required to clear this fault.
Calibration Fault base. RAM is most likely defective. Power up and Error Code 2F Hex in the error list.
Calibration error prompts may provide additional
information.
ERROR 430 The Rotor Interlock Feedback signal was active Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on
Generator Fault during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock sheet 3 location D 8 and ROTOR SELECT signal of the
check. Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU
schematic.
Are the 60hz clocks at FETS AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86?
Does relay AMX1-A3-A2-K39 pull in?
Is the rotor ok?
ERROR 431 The kVp Demand Feedback was high after Connector intact from CPU to filament control board?
Generator Fault command was output during the prep cycle. DAC output correct? Is it approximately 0.069 volts per kVp.
Is the analog multiplexer working correctly?
12-14

ERROR 432 The Filament Current Demand Feedback was Connector intact from CPU to filament control board?
Generator Fault high after command was output during the prep Does the filament inverter turn on?
cycle.
The filament current feedback must be within 0.69 volts of
the command from the CPU. Use 3.0V for PROMS
46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later.
ERROR 433 Leakage Compensation Command feedback was Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board.
Generator Fault high after command was output during the prep Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at
cycle. 125 kVp.
Connector intact from CPU to filament control board?
The leakage compensation feedback must be within 0.2
volts of the command from the CPU.
ERROR 435 Tap Feedback did not correspond with taps Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signal of the
Generator Fault selected during the prep cycle. Generator and AEC Control port on sheet 3 location A 5 of
the CPU schematic.
Check connection to the 1kHz board.
Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board.
Check wiring to tap relay coils.
ERROR 436 The X-RAY ON status signal was asserted in Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet
Generator Fault pre-exposure interlock check during the prep 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
cycle. Check XRAY ON circuit from filament/kVp control board to
the CPU.
ERROR 437 Back Up Timer Ok status signal was not asserted Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port
Generator Fault in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep on sheet 4 location F 8of the CPU schematic.
cycle. This error will follow a 466 error. Was X-RAY ON asserted at some time other than during an
exposure (by noise perhaps)? This would be the case if the
error log does not have 66 codes.
Check for loose or missing ground connections in the
generator and high voltage circuits.
ERROR 439 The X-ray On status signal was not asserted Check EXP START CMND signal of the Generator Control
Generator Fault within two milliseconds after the Exposure Start 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 and X-RAY ON signals of the
Command signal was asserted. Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU
schematic.
Does the start command get to the inverter?
Does the safety contactor pull in?
Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what
was selected?
Do the correct tap relays pull in?
Check the XRAY ON circuitry.
Check kVp feedback circuitry.
12-15

ERROR 43A Rotor Interlock feedback was low during the Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status Port on
Generator Fault exposure interlock check. sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic, and ROTOR
SELECT* signals of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4
location B 8 of the CPU schematic.
Is 60Hz inverter functioning?
Check feedback circuits.
Error Code 3A Hex in the error list.
ERROR 43B Tap feedback did not correspond with the taps Check TAP1* through TAP6* of the Generator Control 2
Generator Fault selected during the exposure interlock check. port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic, and TAP
1 FDBK through TAP 6 FDBK of the Generator and AEC
Status Port on sheet 3 location E 7 of the CPU schematic.
Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board.
Error Code 3B Hex in the error list.
ERROR 43D During the exposure interlock check, KVP DMN Check KVP DMN FDBK+ and KVP DMN FDBK- on sheet
Generator Fault FDBK was high. 5 location E 1 of the CPU schematic.
Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D
Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic.
Check connection to the filament/kVp board.
Check feedback circuitry.
Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard.
Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp.
Error Code 3D Hex in the error list.
ERROR 43E During the exposure interlock check, FIL FDBK Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1
Generator Fault was high.(Only displayed after 100 occurrences) of the CPU schematic.
Is the unit properly calibrated? If the initial kVp is off by
more than 8% a recalibration is required.
Check the feedback circuitry.
Error Code 3E Hex in the error list.
ERROR 443 The X-Ray On signal did not become in–active Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet
Generator Fault within two milliseconds after the Exposure Stop 3 location D 8 and EXP START CMND signal of the
Command. This error will be immediately Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU
followed by the breaker tripping. schematic.
Check that the kVp cal jumper is not installed.
Does the stop command get to the stop SCR?
12-16

ERROR 450 For non–Orion x–ray tubes: Check X-RAY PRESS SW signal of the Critical Status port
Generator Fault The tube pressure switch was open during the on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check. For non–Orion x–ray tubes only: Check the connection from
the CPU to the pressure switch.
For Orion x–ray tubes only: For Orion x–ray tubes only: Check the connection from the
The tube temperature switch was open during the CPU to the temperature switch.
prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.
Check for a faulty switch.
Check the receiving circuits on the CPU.
ERROR 453 The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was high and the Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on
Generator Fault field light was not on during the prep cycle sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
pre-exposure interlock check. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter.
Check for faulty feedback circuitry.
ERROR 454 The 1k Hz Inverter Ready signal was high and Check 1KHZ INVERTER OK signal of the Critical Status
Generator Fault the field light was not on during the prep cycle port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
pre-exposure interlock check. Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz inverter
board.
ERROR 456 Tap select feedback indicated one or more taps Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signals of the
Generator Fault were active when none were selected. Generator and AEC Status port on sheet 3 location 7 of the
CPU schematic.
Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board.
ERROR 457 The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was not asserted Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on
Generator Fault when 60 Hz inverter was turned on during the sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
prep cycle. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter.
Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on.
ERROR 458 Rotor Interlock Feedback was not asserted when Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on
Generator Fault 60 Hz inverter was turned on during prep cycle. sheet 3 location D 8, and ROTOR SELECT signal of the
Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the
CPU schematic.
Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter.
Check that the rotor select relay pulls in.
12-17

ERROR 459 The kVp Command Feedback was low after Check connection to the filament/kVp board.
Generator Fault command was output during the prep cycle. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard.
ERROR 45A LEAKAGE COMP FDBK was low after the Check LEAKAGE COMP FDBK+ and LEAKAGE COMP
Generator Fault command was output during the prep cycle. FDBK- on sheet 5 location H 1 of the CPU schematic.
Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard.
Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at
125 kVp.
Error Code 5A Hex in the error list.
ERROR 45B FIL FDBK was low after the command was Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1
Generator Fault output during the prep cycle. of the CPU schematic.
Check that the voltage across R188 on the filament/kVp
control board is 0.45 to 0.55V.
Is the 60Hz inverter running properly?
The voltage across AMX1-A4-C6 should be approximately
27 Volts when the 60Hz inverter is turned on.
Error Code 5B Hex in the error list.
ERROR 45C The 1 kHz inverter ready signal was not asserted Check 1kHz INVERTER READY signal of the Critical
Generator Fault after the 60 Hz inverter turned on during prep. Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz board.
Check that AMX1-A4-C2 charges to at least 70VDC when
the 60Hz inverter is turned on.
Error Code 5C Hex in the error list.
ERROR 45D Filament shorted signal was asserted during the Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port
Generator Fault prep cycle. on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check the circuitry associated with this signal.
Check R150 on CPU 46–232828 or R321 on CPU
46–264974.
Error Code 5D Hex in the error list.
12-18

ERROR 45E Filament shorted signal failed to be asserted Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port
Generator Fault when the filament driver was turned on during on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
prep. Because its resistance is low initially (cold), Does the filament inverter turn on?
the filament should appear to be shorted for a
short while when the inverter is first turned on. Are the high voltage cables connected correctly?
Is the filament open?
Error Code 5E Hex in the error list.
ERROR 45F Filament shorted signal did not go low after the Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port
Generator Fault filament was allowed to heat up during prep. on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Anode/Cathode cables reversed. Are the high voltage cables reversed?
Is the filament drive sufficient?
The small filament should be selected in the high voltage
transformer.
Error Code 5F Hex in the error list.
ERROR 460 Tube Pressure Switch opened during exposure Check X-RAY PRESSURE SW signal of the Critical Status
Generator Fault interlock check. port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check the connection from the CPU to the pressure switch.
Check for a faulty switch.
Check the receiving circuits on the CPU.
Did the switch really trip due to high pressure or low
pressure?
ERROR 461 The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was low during Check 60 HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on
Generator Fault exposure interlock check. sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter.
ERROR 462 Exposure time was excessive according to the Check LOW RESOLUTION signals of the Generator
Generator Fault programmable interval timer count. The exposure Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU
was terminated before mAs timer expired. schematic.
Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by
more than 8% a recalibration is required.)
Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long
exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1.
ERROR 463 The kVp Command Feedback was low during the Check connection to the filament/kVp board.
Generator Fault exposure interlock check. Check feedback circuitry.
Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board.
12-19

ERROR 465 Filament Current Command Feedback was low Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long
Generator Fault during exposure interlock check. (Only display exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1.
after 100 occurrences) Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by
Check the feedback circuitry.
ERROR 466 Hardware back up timer expired. Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port
Generator Fault Error 437 will occur during the next prep attempt. on sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic.
Does the XRAY ON signal oscillate when the exposure is
terminated.
Is there excessive noise in the unit which that trips flip-flop
U120A on CPU 46–232828 or U95 on CPU 46–264974
Are all grounds properly connected in the generator.
ERROR 467 Exposure was determined to be short. Check FREQ FDBK0 signal of the On Board Control port
Generator Fault on sheet 5 location B 9 of the CPU schematic.
Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by
Is the mA excessively high (i.e. greater than 125 mA)?
Check preheat circuitry on CPU board and Fil/kVp
board.
ERROR 468 The Exposure Command Active status signal Check EXP STOP CMND signal of the Generator Control 1
Generator Fault was high after Exposure Stop Command was port on sheet location B 7 of the CPU schematic.
given. Does the EXP STOP CMND properly reset:
U144B on CPU 46–232828 or
U140 on CPU 46–264974
Check the circuits related to this signal.
ERROR 469 The X-Ray On status went low during the Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet
Generator Fault exposure. 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic.
Check circuitry related to this circuit. (i.e. does the signal
oscillate during the exposure when it should be a solid
high?)
During Calibration:
Does the start command get to the inverter?
Does the safety contactor pull in?
Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what
was selected?
Do the correct tap relays pull in?
Check kV feedback signal. It should look like the signal from
the High Voltage Divider.
12-20
SECTION 13
THEORY
13-1 Power–up Diagnostics
The power–up diagnostic firmware is responsible for verifying the integrity of the follow-
ing major functions/components:
The 80C31 microcontroller.

The program code EPROM checksum.
The non–volatile RAM battery.
The RAM external to the microcontroller.
The calibration data checksum.
The watchdog timer.
The programmable timers external to the microcontroller.
The A/D converter circuitry and power supplies.
13-2 Visual Indication Of Testing
As the power up tests are executing, message display indicates the various test numbers. It
takes the following form:
TEST - xx yyyyyy
where xx is the test number from 01 – 07 and yyyyyy is PASSED if the test passed or
FAILED if it did not.
There are 8 Light Emitting Diodes on the CPU board which light to indicate which test is
being executed. Upon power–up or reset, all LED’s are lit. Once the tests begin to execute,
the lit LED’s represent the binary code of the test being executed. Note that test 0, the CPU
test, is not indicated on the alpha display, but is represented on the LED ’s when all are
turned off. The prompt TESTING COMPLETE displays upon completion of the testing if
a fatal power–up fault was not detected.
13-3 Power Up Tests
Testing is done in a confidence building manner. If a test fails, a failure indication is given.
If the failure is fatal, program execution stops. If the test is non–fatal, testing continues after
a brief delay while the failure prompt is given. If a test passes, the next power–up test is
executed. This sequencing continues until a fatal fault occurs or all the tests of been suc-
cessfully executed. Control is passed to the Application Code, Calibration Code, or Diag-
nostics.
When the intended operating mode is the application code, non–fatal faults are those faults
which do not directly effect the drives. Should a non –fatal fault be detected, x–ray and
charging will be inhibited and the message DRIVES ONLY displays when the application
mode is entered. This provision is incorporated to allow the unit to be moved to a conven-
ient area for servicing if the drive circuits appear to be functional. In order to access diag-
nostics, the service switch must be set before the TESTING COMPLETE message fin-
ishes displaying. Functional descriptions for each of the power–up tests are given in the
following paragraphs.
13-1
13-4 80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test – 00)
Testing the 80C31 Microcontroller involves verifying the functionality of each of the fol-
lowing:
CPU registers and timers

data transfers
arithmetic operations
logical operations
boolean variable manipulations
program branching
This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.
13-5 EPROM Checksum Test (test – 01)
The sum for the first 65535 bytes of program code is calculated and checked to make sure it
is equal to the 65536th byte. This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended oper-
ating mode.
13-6 Ram Battery Test (test – 02)
This test checks the integrity of the non–volatile ram battery. If the ram battery is below 2.0
volts, the first write to ram after power up will not be executed. This fact is used to deter-
mine the state of the battery.
Note: For CPU Board 46-264974, the second RAM battery is protected by checkĆ
sum.
13-7 External Ram Test (test – 03)
The external ram test is non–destructive and involves writing and reading the patterns 00,
FF, AA and 55 for each RAM location. In addition, a destructive addressing test is done on
the RAM locations not allocated to the non–volatile database. This test is FATAL regardless
of firmware set or intended operating mode.
13-8 Calibration Data Checksum Test (test – 04)
The checksum for the calibration data is calculated and checked to make sure it is equal to
the checksum value stored in non–volatile memory. This test is non–fatal if the calibration
or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It is non–fatal for the application mode
only if the handle calibration data checksums are ok.
13-2
13-8-1 Checksum By–pass
On occasions, troubleshooting errors that occur during calibration can be more efficient if
done in the applications mode. However, unless the unit is totally calibrated it will not allow
normal applications operation. This is where the checksum by–pass is useful. The follow-
ing diagram illustrates how this is done:
Note: Before proceeding with the checksum bypass, enter calibration made and see
which checksums have failed. If for instance, the drive checksum failed, a
quick cal might resolve the problem.
POWER OFF SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE IN THE “RUN”

POSITION BEFORE POWER IS TURNED ON.
POWER ON
TEST 00
TEST 01
TEST 02 SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO

THE “SERVICE” POSITION BEFORE “TEST 04
– FAILED” IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.
TEST 03
TEST 04 - FAILED
TEST 05
SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO

TEST 06 THE “RUN” POSITION SOMEWHERE IN THIS
TIME FRAME BEFORE “TESTING COMPLETE”
IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.
TEST 07
TESTING COMPLETE
ENTER APPLICATION MODE

WITH ALL FUNCTIONS ENABLED
13-3
13-9 Watchdog Timer Test (test – 05)
The watchdog timer is checked to make sure that when strobed, its output goes high within
100 us, stays high for at least 30 ms and goes low within 75 ms. This test is non–fatal for any
intended operating mode.
13-10 Programmable Interval Timer Test

(test – 06)
This test checks the functionality of the 82C54 timers 0 and 2, including the ability to count
and to provide the proper strobe on their outputs. This test is non–fatal for any intended
operating mode.
13-11 A/D Converter Circuitry Test

(test – 07)
This test checks the functionality of the A/D converter, the sample and hold and the analog
multiplexer. In addition, the integrity of the processor +5V supply is verified in this test.
This test is non–fatal if the calibration or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It
is fatal for the application mode (15V and +24V also tested if dip switch #3 is enabled on
CPU Board 46–264974, starting with firmware 46–302688G1/46–302687G1).
13-12 Application Mode
The application mode consists of the functions that the hospital personnel typically encoun-
ter, i.e. Charging, Driving and X–ray.
13-4
13-13 Charge Control
13-13-1 Charge Control Algorithm

for PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1,
46–303272G1/46–303273G1 and
46–303815G1/46–303816G1
Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration
13–1 shows a typical charge profile.
ILLUSTRATION 13–1
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1, 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND 46–303815G1/46–303816G1
(EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE)

BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME
BATTERY 130V
BATTERY
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
120V
110V
CHARGE COMPLETE
2.25
BATTERY BATTERY
CHARGE 2.0A CHARGE
CURRENT CURRENT
(AMPS) (AMPS)
1.5A
1.0A
CHARGE COMPLETE
0.5A
0.0A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TIME (HRS)
13-5
Every 20th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 13–2 ).
ILLUSTRATION 13–2
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1, 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND
46–303815G1/46–303816G1 (EVERY 20TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE (EVERY 20TH CYCLE)

BATTERY 130V
BATTERY
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
120V
110V
CHARGE COMPLETE
2.25
BATTERY BATTERY
CHARGE 2.0A CHARGE
CURRENT CURRENT
(AMPS) (AMPS)
1.5A
1.0A
CHARGE COMPLETE
0.5A
0.0A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TIME (HRS)
13-6
13-13-2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1
Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration
13–3 shows a typical charge profile.
ILLUSTRATION 13–3
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE)

BATTERY 130V
BATTERY
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
120V
110V
CHARGE COMPLETE
2.25
BATTERY BATTERY
CHARGE 2.0A CHARGE
CURRENT CURRENT
(AMPS) (AMPS)
1.5A
1.0A
CHARGE COMPLETE
0.5A
0.0A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TIME (HRS)
13-7
Every 10th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 13–4).
ILLUSTRATION 13–4
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316886G1 (EVERY 10TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE, EVERY 10TH CYCLE)

BATTERY 130V
BATTERY
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
120V
110V
CHARGE COMPLETE
2.25
BATTERY BATTERY
CHARGE 2.0A CHARGE
CURRENT CURRENT
(AMPS) (AMPS)
1.5A
1.0A
CHARGE COMPLETE
0.5A
0.0A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TIME (HRS)
13-8
13-13-3 Charge Control Algorithm

for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2
Charging can be entered from the application mode by plugging in the line cord. The
AMX4 charger can be classified as a pseudo constant voltage charger. This is because the
charger hardware is actually designed for constant current charging but the firmware strives
to maintain a constant voltage by adjusting the charger current output. Illustrations 13–5
through 13–8 show various aspects of actual charge profiles. Profiles will vary with state–
of–charge, battery condition, etc.
Illustrations 13–5 through 13–8 show only a small sample of the possible charge scenarios.
The intent here is to present the most significant elements of the charging algorithm and
how the various charge control DATA BASE parameters would effect charge performance.
Even though the details of Illustrations 13–5 through 13–8 apply specifically to PROMS
46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2, the concepts presented are
valid for all PROM versions.
A charge cycle can be either a non–extended (top–off) or an extended cycle. Most cycles
will be of the non–extended type as seen in Illustration 13–5. However, every n+1 times that
charge is initiated, the AMX4 charger will automatically attempt an extended charge as
shown in Illustration 13–7. (n = the value of the DATA BASE parameter “Trickle Limit”).
An extended charge is considered valid once 1/2 of the extended time has elapsed. If this
condition is not met because the charger is unplugged, the system will continue to initiate
extended charges.
13-9
ILLUSTRATION 13–5
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL NON–EXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR
SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
TYPICAL NON-EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE

FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
(BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)
Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

VOLTAGE ACROSS CHARGE CHARGER
RESISTOR AMX1A3R1 OFF
SWITCH TO
TRICKLE MODE
CHARGE CURRENT DAC

VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1
TP29
TIME FRAMES – SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW

A" B" C" D" E" F"
...
TIME (Hours)
Illustration 13–5 shows a typical non–extended charge profile. About 50% of the usable
capacity of the batteries was removed prior to charge. The graph plots battery voltage vs.
charge current. Charge current is represented two ways: by the voltage across the charging
resistor, and by the voltage out of the charge current demand DAC. Actual current can be
calculated by dividing the voltage across AMX1A3R1 by 2.5W. The various charge time
frames are as follows:
TIME FRAME “A”: This is the charge start–up period. The charge current is increased to
the maximum allowable level for the present set of conditions (battery
state–of–charge, line voltage, etc.). See Illustration 13–6 for an expansion of this time
frame.
TIME FRAME “B”: This is the current limited period. The level that the charge current is
limited to is determined by the DATA BASE parameter “Maximum Charging mA”. The
charger will remain at this level until the battery voltage starts to approach the clamp volt-
age. NOTE: This time frame will be by–passed for charge cycles which are initiated when
the batteries are nearly fully charged.
13-10
TIME FRAME “C”: This is the clamp anticipation period. During this time frame, the
charger decreases the charge current in anticipation of the voltage clamp. Clamp anticipa-
tion begins at a voltage 7.0V below the voltage set by the DATA BASE parameter “High
Charge Clamp Volts”. The rate of charge current decrease is a function of the rate of battery
voltage increase. Clamp anticipation is incorporated to minimize clamp voltage overshoot.
TIME FRAME “D”: This is the voltage limited period which begins once the voltage set
by the value of the DATA BASE parameter “High Charge Clamp Volts” is exceeded. Dur-
ing this time some ripple will be noticeable on the voltage waveform. This ripple is due to
the limited resolution of the digital–to–analog convertor which controls charge current.
The duration of this time period is variable depending on the state–of–charge of the batter-
ies prior to charge as well as over all battery condition. This time frame ends, as does the
“High Charge Mode”, when the charge current drops to the level set by the DATA BASE
parameter “Start Timed Charge Counts”.
TIME FRAME “E”: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to
“Trickle Mode” is made. When the charger is in the trickle mode, the resolution of the sys-
tem increases by a factor of 10. This is the reason for the sudden increase of voltage at
AMX1A2A1 TP29 by an order of magnitude. (Note, however, that the voltage across the
AMX1A3R1 charging resistor doesn’t change appreciably.) During the initial stages of this
time period, the battery voltage may increase (as shown in Illustration 13–1 ). This is be-
cause a one count change of the charge DAC does not have the same affect in the trickle
mode as in the high charge mode. The firmware decreases the current by one DAC count
once every two minutes as long as the voltage remains less than two volts above the clamp
level, and once every 15 seconds if the voltage is more than two volts but less than five volts
over the clamp. If the battery voltage exceeds the clamp by more than five volts, the firm-
ware will drop the charge current to zero for 15 seconds and then reapply it at a lower level.
This period ends when the amount of time equal to the DATA BASE parameter “TOP OFF
TIME” in minutes has elapsed and charge current is brought to zero.
TIME FRAME “F”: This is the “CHARGE COMPLETE” period. The charger output is
zero, the system electronics are powered from the A.C. line, and “CHARGE COMPLETE”
is displayed on the message display. The system will remain in this state until the system is
unplugged from its AC outlet. If during this time period the battery voltage falls below the
level set by the DATA BASE parameter “Monitor Full Capacity Millivolts”, the firmware
will trip the circuit breaker to conserve charge if the system has been in the “CHARGE
COMPLETE” mode for at least the amount of time specified by the DATA BASE parame-
ter “Breaker Trip Time”. One of three conditions can cause this to occur. First, the battery
set can have one or more shorted cells each decreasing the voltage by approximately 2
volts. Second, the regulator circuit which supplies power to the system electronics may be
defective, forcing the battery to supply this power. Finally the breaker might trip if the sys-
tem is left in the “CHARGE COMPLETE” mode for many days, because of the battery’s
own self–discharge.
13-11
ILLUSTRATION 13–6
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE START–UP PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANT-
LY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE

FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)
BATTERY VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE ACROSS
CHARGE RESISTOR
AMX1A3R1
CHARGE CURRENT DAC

VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29
TIME (Minutes)
Illustration 13–6 shows in detail what occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle. When the
system first senses that the charge cord has been plugged in, it sets the Charge Current DAC
to its appropriate level and then closes the charge enable relays (K150 and K187) on the
charge board AMX1A3A1. Charge current is maintained at this initial level for approxi-
mately 75 seconds to allow for stabilization. The Charge Current DAC output is then in-
creased at a rate of 9 DAC counts per 18 seconds until the maximum current level (set by the
DATA BASE parameter “Maximum Charging mA”) is reached. See Illustration 13–8 for a
case where the charge current does not ramp up to its maximum level.
13-12
ILLUSTRATION 13–7
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY
DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE
FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
BATTERY VOLTAGE

Charge DAC (VOLTS)
SWITCH TO
FLOAT CHARGE
CHARGE CURRENT DAC
SWITCH TO
TRICKLE MODE
TIME FRAMES – SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW

A" B" C"
...
TIME (Hours)
The profile in Illustration 13–7 shows what occurs when a battery which has been only
slightly discharged is recharged. Because the battery quickly becomes resistant to charge,
its voltage climbs at a fast rate and generally over–shoots the clamp voltage as shown.
TIME FRAME “A”: This is the “High Charge Mode”. See Illustration 13–8 for an expan-
sion and detailed description of this time frame.
TIME FRAME “B”: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to
“Trickle Mode” is made. For an extended charge this timed charge ends when the amount of
time equal to the DATA BASE parameter “Final Phase Time” in hours has elapsed. The
charger maintains the battery voltage at the clamp level by slowly decreasing the current.
TIME FRAME “C”: This is the “CHARGE COMPLETE” period for an extended charge.
The charger enters a float charge condition, and charger output is adjusted to maintain the
battery voltage at the level determined by the DATA BASE parameter “Trickle Charge
Clamp Voltage”. This voltage will be maintained until the charge cord is removed from its
AC outlet.
13-13
ILLUSTRATION 13–8
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE START–UP PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY
DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE

FOR SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET
BATTERY VOLT-
AGE

Charge DAC (VOLTS)
CHARGE CURRENT DAC

TIME (Minutes)
Illustration 13–8 shows what occurs when a nearly charged battery is recharged. Charge is
initiated as described for Illustration 13–6, except that the current never reaches its maxi-
mum level because current stops increasing when the battery voltage exceeds the clamp
voltage minus seven volts (123V in this case). The charger now enters a clamp anticipation
phase as indicated by the Time Frame “C” description for Illustration 13–5. Once the clamp
voltage is exceeded, the charge current decreases at a rate of 1 DAC count every six seconds
if the voltage is increasing at a rate greater than 0.2V in six seconds. Otherwise, charge cur-
rent is decreased at a rate of 1 DAC count every 40 seconds. If the clamp voltage is exceed-
ed by more than 2.00V, the firmware brings the charge current demand to zero for 15 sec-
onds to force the battery voltage to drop before the charge current is reapplied at a level 3
DAC counts lower. If the battery voltage needs to be dropped more than 4 times within a 4
minute window, the charge current is reapplied at a level 10 DAC counts lower.
13-14
13-14 Battery Charge Diagnostics
13-14-1 Battery Charger Run–Time Diagnostics
Checking charge current feedback. The actual feedback must be within 20% of the
expected feedback otherwise an error is flagged.
Checking to see if the charger is saturated. During the high current charging phase, the
charger is assumed to be saturated if the charge current feedback is approximately 6% lower
than the expected value. Charger saturation occurs when the charger can not meet the
charge current demand. Usually this takes place toward the end of a charge cycle when the
battery voltage is high (head voltage is low). When saturation is detected, charge current
demand is decreased.
13-14-2 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and Later)
If the service switch is placed into the “service” or down position while the system is charg-
ing, the current battery voltage and charger current are displayed on the kVp/mAs numeric
display. The display takes the formats of Illustration 13–9.
ILLUSTRATION 13–9
CHARGING DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY
BATTERY VOLTAGE DISPLAY CHARGER CURRENT DISPLAY
Note: The display is only updated once every six seconds and the displayed values
lag the actual values because of voltage and current averaging inherent in the
AMX4 metering circuits and algorithms. With the battery volt meter and
charger properly calibrated, errors up to 1% for the battery voltage and 5%
for the charge current are possible.
13-15 Drive
13-15-1 Drive Control
The drive mode is entered from application code whenever the drive handle is engaged and
is exited when the handle is released.
The Drive Control Algorithm converts the drive handle input to a drive command, allowing
“reverse only” if the bumper is engaged. It sends the status of the x–ray tube parked switch
to the drive control board.
13-15
ILLUSTRATION 13–10
DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT
DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT
(0) 255
DRIVE DAC
COMMAND
(COUNTS)
(128) 128
DEADBAND
(255) 0
HALL SENSOR OUTPUT HALL SENSOR OUTPUT HALL SENSOR OUTPUT
@ FULL REVERSE WITH NO @ FULL FORWARD
HANDLE DISPLACEMENT HANDLE DISPLACEMENT HANDLE DISPLACEMENT
From the graph on Illustration 13–10 it becomes apparent the any handle input will map the
appropriate output drive command. It should be noted that the left and right channels are
independent from one another.
Drive Control Run–Time Diagnostics in the main drive control loop check drive current
feedback to see that it is equal to or less than the drive command. Checks for drive stalls and
stuck handle are also done.
13-15-2 Drive Diagnostics
Using the Run–Time Diagnostic Drive Display to Isolate Drive Errors. Firmware in-
cludes diagnostics which display drive command and feedback for both left and right drives
on the kVp mAs display. The displays are activated any time the service switch is active
when the unit is in the drive mode. The displays are activated any time the service switch is
active when the unit is in the drive mode. The display format is as follows:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LEFT OUTPUT LEFT FEEDBACK RIGHT OUTPUT RIGHT FEEDBACK
13-16
The displays change very fast but you should be able to notice trends. That is, as the output
increases so should the feedback and when the output decreases the feedback should follow.
The only time the feedback equals the output is when the drive power amp is not pulse width
limited which only occurs when the unit is accelerating from stop and when driving very
slowly. Note that the data is displayed in hex and that because of the bipolar operation of the
drives a request for no drive corresponds to 80 (HEX) on the display. Keeping this in mind,
the feedback should always be on the same side of 80 as the Output command (+ a couple
counts). If a drive fault should occur, the firmware “locks” the fault condition on the display
as long as the drive deadman switch is held active. This will allow you to record the display
so that you can interpret what it means. The display is especially helpful in isolating blown
fuses or bad connections to the drive motors. If either of these conditions were present you
would see the feedback remain constant while the output command is very active.
Conditions which are detected as faults:
1. Current feedback indicating drive in the opposite direction from what was comman-
ded.
2. Current feedback in excess of what was commanded.
3. Current feedback which doesn’t exceed 10% of the output command for at least 100
ms.
Remember: For commands above 80H, the larger the number the greater the output comĆ
mand. For commands below 80H, the smaller the number the greater the outĆ
put command. Also, the output commands displayed are scaled down by 63%
from the actual output so that they correspond to the feedback.
13-17
13-15-3 Drive Control Software Theory
HOW SOFTWARE CONTROLS THE AMX DRIVE

Note: For the following theory, refer to Section 15, Illustration 15-8, Left & Right
Drive Functional Flow".
WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE HALL EFFECT SENSORS:
The AMX software looks for certain voltages from the Hall effect sensors in the Drive han-
dle:
The voltages from the Hall effect sensors enter the CPU via analog MUX U342. They
can be measured at CPU TP22 (left handle) or TP21 (right handle). They must be as
follows, or calibration errors will occur:
- With handle at rest, this voltage should be between 3.125 and 7.5 VDC.
- Move handle full forward, and voltage should change in either direction by
at least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. Direction is not important since
this depends on magnet polarity and is calibrated out.
- Move handle full reverse, and voltage should change in other direction by at
least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. The voltage must change in the
OTHER direction, or a HANDLE CAL ERR 4 will occur.
Always push full forward and pull full back during calibration. Otherwise, the CPU
may see a greater or lesser voltage than expected during applications, and cause a 218
error.
During applications, the software looks at the Hall sensor voltage and does some cal-
culations based on data gathered during handle calibration. The calculations convert
the approximately 3–7 Volt Hall signal into a –10 to +10 Volt signal used as the Drive
Command to the drive servo. This command is the output from a D/A converter and
can be seen on TP19 (left drive) and TP18 (right drive). A 0 Volt command is a com-
mand for no motion, while a + or – command provides drive in a forward or reverse
direction.
If there is no voltage change at Test Points 21 or 22, explore the Handle Check signal.
WHAT THE HANDLE CHECK SIGNAL IS FOR:
The AMX CPU makes the handle check signal from a D/A output that is normally used for
the Charge Current Command. While AMX is driven, it cannot charge, so this D/A per-
forms double duty.
The Handle Check signal is at CPU TP29. This should measure about 10 Volts with
a meter. When the drive enable bar is engaged, the signal is actually a square wave
that is 10 Volts for 24 mS and 0 Volts for 1 mS. When this signal drops to zero, it forces
the signal from the Hall sensor to zero. The signal is continuously 10 Volts when the
enable bar is released.
13-18
During driving, the CPU looks for the drop to zero Volts once every 24 ms. During
the 24 ms in between, the CPU can get the actual handle command. If this zero Volt
drop is missing, there will be a 218 error. This is a safety feature to guarantee that the
analog MUX, Sample and Hold, and A/D are working correctly while driving, in order
to prevent runaway of the AMX.
WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE DRIVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL:
The CPU expects certain voltages from the drive servo’s Drive Feedback signal that is input
to the CPU at PIN 25 (left drive) and PIN 26 (right drive) of analog MUX U342.
The Drive Command from CPU is a –10 to +10 Volt command with 0 Volts meaning
“do not drive.” The feedback that should be seen from the servo is calculated by the
following formula:
Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((Drive Command x 0.625) x 0.5)
Thus there is a Drive Command that goes above and below 0 Volts which produces
a feedback that goes above and below 5 Volts.
The software looks at this feedback whenever the enable bar is picked up. An error
occurs if any of the following happens:
- The feedback is in opposite direction of what is expected:
For example, if command is less than 0, feedback should be less than 5 Volts.
If feedback is greater than 5 Volts, this is instantly an error.
- The feedback is greater than expected:
For example, if the Drive Command is 4 Volts, feedback should be:
Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 6.25 Volts
Thus if feedback is greater than 6.25 Volts, there is a 214 or 216 error.
- The feedback based upon 10% of command is less than expected for more
than 100 ms:
For example, using the 4 Volt command above, 10% of 4 is 0.4 Volts, so feedĆ
back should be at least:
Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((0.4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 5.125 Volts
Thus, if feedback is less than 5.125 volts for more than 100 ms, there is a 215
or 217 error.
Monitor the command and feedback by flipping down the Service Switch while in
applications mode. Lifting the enable bar should cause many digits to display on the
kV/mA display. (There is a good description of this in Section 13–15–2 of this manu-
al.) Note that the display for the command is scaled by the .625 (63%) factor so that
the command and feedback will match.
13-19
The software looks at this feedback as soon as handle is lifted. When not driving, there
should be about 5 Volts at PINS 25 and 26 of the MUX. If there isn’t about 5 Volts
upon picking up the enable bar, there will be a “RELEASE HANDLE” or 214 thru
217 error. This can be an aid in troubleshooting. If there is an error by just pulling up
the enable bar, it means that feedback was never correct, and the problem is probably
the CPU or Drive Controller. If handle has to be moved to get error, there is probably
a blown fuse or bad Power Amp board.
Usually the Power Amp Fails because a FET becomes shorted. This shorted FET will
probably destroy a DG201 analog switch on the Drive Controller (U31 or U51), and
blow a fuse (F1 or F2 by the drive contactors). Determine if the FET’s are shorted by
measuring their impedance with an OHM meter. There should be at least 10K OHM
between any combination of the case and the 2 leads. These FET’s are easy to replace.
Note: Never replace a drive controller board or a fuse without first checking to make
sure that FET's are not shorted. Otherwise, a DG201 or a fuse will blow again!
INPUT AND OUTPUT PORTS THAT EFFECT THE DRIVE:
The CPU looks at several signals on the U151 Input port and sends out several signals on the
U264 Output port.
INPUT PORT U151

- DRIVE ENA SW (PIN 13) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that Drive Enable Bar
is engaged.
- TUBE PARKED SW (PIN 18) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that tube is parked.
- BUMPER (PIN 3) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that front bumper has hit someĆ
thing.
- STALL (PIN 4 OR 7) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that Drive Controller senses
too much motor current.
OUTPUT PORT U264
- MOTOR ENA (PIN 5) -- When this goes high, it releases the brakes and
energizes the drive contactors. (Drive enable bar must also be engaged for
brakes and contactor to work.) The software looks for Drive enable bar to
be engaged, for no stall, and for no bumper with a forward drive command.
- DRIVE RESET (PIN 6) -- This pulses high to reset the stall latches on the
Drive Controller board whenever enable bar is pulled up.
- FULL SPD ENA (PIN 19) -- When high, it allows full speed. The software
looks for tube to be parked, and for front bumper to be released to allow full
speed.
13-20
13-16 Generator Control
13-16-1 Generator Control Algorithm
Following is a sequence of events for a no error x–ray cycle:
1. Prep switch is pressed.

2. 60Hz inverter is turned off if the field light was on (this prevents electrical noise when
the rotor relay is switched in).
3. Check critical status interlocks.
4. Turn on the 60Hz inverter (rotor).
5. Turn on filament inverter and boost the filament.
6. Output kVp DAC command.
7. Output leakage compensation DAC command.
8. Pull in the safety contactor.
9. Determine battery voltage.
10. Turn on the 1kHz inverter.
11. Output the required filament current command.
12. Select the appropriate tap relays.
13. Display “READY FOR X–RAY”
14. Expose switch is pressed.
15. mAs integrator is enabled.
16. Start exposure command is issued.
17. Auto Cal data is collected.
18. Interlocks are continuously checked during the exposure.
19. When the selected mAs is reached on the mAs integrator, the exposure is terminated
(the “stop command” is issued)
20. All DAC outputs are set to “0”.
21. The 60Hz, 1kHz and 2kHz Inverters are turned off.
22. Adjust filament current demand database using Auto Cal data.
23. Turn off rotor and tap select relays.
24. Wait for Prep Switch to be released.
13-16-2 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand
The correct kVp, demand is determined from the operator selected kVp and calibrated data
base values. During kVp calibration, the relationship between 4 kVp demand DAC outputs
and the resulting kVp is determined. All kVp demands are then linearly interpolated in be-
tween these database entries.
13-21
13-16-3 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination
The selected tap relay combination is a function of selected kVp, battery voltage and cali-
brated tap constants. The tap combination that will yield an average emission current clos-
est to 100mA will be selected.
13-16-4 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand
The proper filament current is determined using the selected kVp and the calculated emis-
sion current resulting from the selected tap relay combination. During filament current
calibration the filament current at 90 and 110 mA of emission current is determined for each
kVp station and stored in the database. A linear interpolation is done on these database ele-
ments using the calculated emission current to arrive at the proper filament current at the
selected kVp.
13-16-5 Auto Calibration
To compensate for tube aging and to “tweak” interpolated filament current points, auto
calibration is done after all exposures longer than 10ms as follows:
Determine how much the filament current needs to be adjusted based on the initial
kVp error of the last exposure.
Weight the filament current table adjustments based on the mA.
Adjust adjacent filament current table points to reflect the change made at the present
station.
13-16-6 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection)
During the PREP and EXPOSURE cycles, the firmware continuously checks the status of
various interlocks. As a result, there 36 unique errors that can appear. All x–ray generator
related faults are indicated by the message “ERROR 4xx”, where xx is a unique error code
for a particular fault.
13-17 Field Light Control
The field light can be turned on any time the unit is not charging or in the x–ray mode (prep
or expose) provided a generator fault has not occurred. The field light is turned on by ena-
bling the 60Hz clocks to the 60Hz inverter. The clocks remain enabled for from 5 to 45 sec-
onds after the field light switch is released. Pressing the field light switch during the 5 to 45
second time period reloads the timer with the calibrated on time. The field light has a maxi-
mum total on time of 200 seconds before it is disabled for cooling.
13-22
13-18 Bar Graph Control For Version

46–302688G1/46–302687G1
Capacity is determined as follows:
When Not Driving Or Charging

NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELA-
0% TION 100%
DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW
* **
112.00V MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN. 116.00V
THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6 OR GREATER
BARS/MIN IN RESPONSE TO VOLTAGE FLUCTUATION
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

MAY BE
MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.
**THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.
When Driving
0% TION
100%
* **
109.00V Maximum rate of decrease is 3.0 bars/min 113.00V
The bar graph will not gain segments in this mode OR GREATER
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE

VALUE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BAT-
TERY AGING.
** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE
VALUE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V.
When Charging 85%

# BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BE-
0% LOW 100%
***
*
114.00V Maximum rate of increase is 3.0 bars/min during
the voltage period and 0.011 bars/min during the
timed charge period.
The bar graph will not lose segments in this mode.
130.00V **
* THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM.

THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V.
** THIS VALUE IS 130.00V.
*** ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE
CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 20TH TIME.
13-23

46–303272G1/46–303273G1 or
46–303815G1/46–303816G1

0% TION 100%
* **
THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VAL-

UE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.
** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.
When Driving
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION
0% DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW 100%
* **
109.00V MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN 111.00V
THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE OR GREATER
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE
0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.
** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE
100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V.
When Charging 85%

# bars linear relation using voltages below
0% 100%
***
*
114.00V MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING
THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE **
TIMED CHARGE PERIOD.
THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS 130.00V
MODE.
* THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS
EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V.
***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OC-
CURS EVERY 20TH TIME.
13-24

46–316685G1/46–316686G1

0% TION 100%
* **
THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

MAY BE
MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.
**THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.
When Driving
0% TION
100%
* **
109.00V MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN 111.00V
THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE OR GREATER
* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VAL-

UE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY
AGING.
** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VAL-
UE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V.
When Charging 85%

# BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BE-
0% LOW 100%
***
*
114.00V MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING
THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE **
TIMED CHARGE PERIOD. 127.00V
THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS
MODE.
* THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL
TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V.
***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EV-
ERY 10TH TIME.
13-25
13-21 Battery Aging for Firmware

46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and Earlier
Note: For Firmware 46-329187G1/46-329188G1 or
46-329187G2/46-329188G2, see Section 13-22-6.
The battery aging algorithm may change the “monitor_zero_capacity_millivolts” to pre-

vent potential error during exposure. This will make the minimum on the bar graph corre-
spond to a voltage higher than 112V. (The normal bargraph range corresponds to 112V min.
and 114V max.)
The algorithm may be disabled and the range reset to norm by loading defaults, running full
calibration, and loading location 19D with 0000. (See the data base access section).

46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or
46–329187G2/46–329188G2 (SMART GAUGE)
This section describes the high–level operation of the battery capacity metering algorithm
for the AMX–4 mobile rad product. This algorithm shall hereafter be referred to as
“SMART GAUGE”. The SMART GAUGE firmware divorces the bar graph display from
battery voltage and instead uses actual usage to approximate remaining capacity. This has
the effect of normalizing all battery sets regardless of manufacturer or manufacturing date.
It also allows the system to be relatively insensitive to bad cells as long as performance is
still there.
13-22-1 Discharge Loads
When the AMX–4 is “ON”, there are five distinct loads on the battery. They are idle, drive,
field light, prep, and x–ray exposures. All load currents except for drive are relatively con-
stant and can be integrated easily over time. To be conservative, the drive load is considered
to be constant at a level equivalent to driving at top speed on a flat level surface.
Note: The additional load of the optional AEC module on the battery set is approxiĆ
mately 5 mA. Since this value is so small, no special compensation is made for
this case.
Available capacity in milliamp hours is decreased from its present level as described by the
follow equation:
remaining capacity = remaining capacity

– idle energy removed since last sample
– drive energy removed since last sample
– field light energy removed since last sample
– prep energy removed since last sample
– xray energy removed since last sample
13-26
The various energy removed values (in milliamp seconds) will be determined from elapsed
time as follows:
ENERGY REMOVED ELAPSED TIME NOMINAL LOAD
idle energy removed = {[Elapsed idle time] 300 (mA)}
drive energy removed = {[Elapsed drive time] 3000 (mA)}
field light energy removed = {[Elapsed field light time] 2500(mA)}
prep energy removed = {[Elapsed xray mode time] 3000(mA)}
Exposure energy removed (in mA seconds) will be determined from exposure data as fol-
lows:
x-ray energy removed = {[Cumulative Exposure Energy since last sample (Joules)]
(conversion factor)
where,
conversion factor =(1000 mA/A) [ 0.75 (generator eff.)100V (typ. loaded volts) ]
= 13

These nominal loads are adjustable via DATA BASE parameters. The load to DATA
BASE names are cross–referenced below:
NOMINAL LOAD DATA BASE PARAMETER

idle Idle Load Current
drive Drive Load Current
field light Field Light Load Current
prep Prep Load Current
The remaining capacity calculations are done each time a new battery voltage value is cal-
culated which is approximately every five seconds. The % capacity remaining is then dis-
played on the 48 segment bargraph. The bargraph has the relationship of each segment rep-
resenting:
Total Capacity (a DATA BASE parameter)
48 segments
Using the default conditions as an example we get:

6500 mAHR/48 seg = 135 mAHR per segment.
Given this default condition, each of the various load modes will remove capacity at differ-
ent rates as follows:
LOAD TYPICAL DAILY
LOAD MODE DISCHARGE RATE
MAGNITUDE USAGE*
Idle 0.3 amps 2.2 segments/hour 0.8 AHR = 6 segments
Drive 3.0 amps 0.4 segments/minute 1.7 AHR = 13 segments
Field Light 2.5 amps 0.3 segments/minute 0.4 AHR = 3 segments
X–Ray Prep 3.0 amps 0.4 segments/minute 0.1 AHR = 1 segment
BASED ON 0.0005 to 0.8
X–ray 0.07 AHR = 0 segments
TECHNIQUE segments/exposure
TOTAL DAILY SEGMENTS TURNED OFF: 23 segments (48%)
*Based on actual field data.
13-27
13-22-2 Emergency Capacity
In order to deal with the rare situation where a customer is nearly finished with a patient
exam when capacity goes to 0 preventing further exposures, an emergency capacity feature
is added. Upon power–up, if 0% capacity is detected, three bar segments will be lit. Thus
cycling the keyswitch will give approximately 50 seconds before the bar graph display goes
to 0% again, allowing enough time to position a patient, to illuminate the field light, and to
take an exposure.
13-22-3 Recharge Phases
During charge, available capacity will be increased in three phases. Phase I is the current
limited phase, Phase II is the voltage limited phase, and Phase III is the timed voltage lim-
ited phase. The following paragraphs describe the rules governing the bar graph update.
PHASE I (Current Limit)
This phase occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle when the charger is putting out its max-
imum current and the voltage has not reached its maximum value. During this time, 50% of
the segments unlit at the beginning of charge will be illuminated. Concurrently, the capac-
ity remaining variable will be increased by 50%.
SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE

+ 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS
AT START OF CHARGE
PRESENT NUMBER
OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENTS AT
START OF CHARGE
Voltage at end of Current Present Voltage Maximum Phase I

Ramp–Up Voltage (127V)
There are several exceptions to the above relationship:
1. This phase may be skipped when attempting to charge fully charged batteries or bat-
teries which are resistant to charge. This occurs when the charging current is more
than 20 DAC counts below maximum at the end of the charge ramp–up.
2. The maximum % change is limited to 10% per volt of difference between the begin-
ning and ending Phase 1 voltages. As an example, if the voltage at the end of the cur-
rent ramp–up is 123V, the maximum % change will be limited to 40%
[(127V–124V)10%].
3. If the clamp anticipation algorithm decreases the charge current by more than 20 DAC
counts, phase 1 will end.
13-28
PHASE II (Voltage Limit)
As the charge clamp voltage is approached or once it is exceeded, charge current is de-
creased to keep the battery charge voltage at the programmed limit. 50% of the segments
unlit at the beginning of PHASE II will be lit during this phase. This phase is complete when
the switch to trickle mode is made. Segments will be lit as a function of the present Charge
DAC count as shown in the following graph.
SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II

+ 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS AT
START OF PHASE II
PRESENT NUMBER
OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENTS AT
START OF PHASE II
DAC Count at Start of Current DAC Switch to Trickle

Phase II Value Mode DAC Value
(typ. 130 counts) (typ. 26 counts)
There is one exception to the above relationship. If charging batteries which are fully
charged, Phase I will be by–passed and the starting Phase II charge DAC count will be very
low. In this case, the maximum % change in capacity is limited to 0.7% per DAC count. As
an example, if the DAC count at the start of Phase II is 76 and the Switch to trickle mode
DAC count is 26, % change in capacity for Phase II will be 35%. Note that for nearly
charged batteries and for batteries resistant to charge, this phase may be very short.
PHASE III (Timed Charge)
After the switch to the trickle mode has been made, the remaining charge is a function of
time. When “CHARGE COMPLETE” is displayed, all bar segments will have been lit. The
timed phase can be a top–off or an extended charge; the relationship is the same. Available
capacity will be increased as shown in the following graph.
ALL
SEGMENTS
PRESENT NUMBER
OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENTS AT
START OF PHASE III
Timer Value at Start Timer = 0

Current Timer
of Timed Phase
Value
13-29
“Stuck–At–Full” Feature
When the charge cycle reaches “CHARGE COMPLETE”, an additional amount of capac-
ity will be added to the remaining capacity. This results in the automotive equivalent of
having the fuel gauge “stuck–at–full” after filling up the fuel tank. The amount of “over-
charge” is defaulted to 500mAHR. The amount of overcharge is controlled by the DATA
BASE parameter Full Charge Excess Capacity. The segments on the bar graph display will
be at full until this “overcharge” is used up during discharge.
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING
RECHARGE (PICTORIAL)
BAR GRAPH PRIOR TO CHARGING

CASE 1 CASE 2
Remaining Capacity = REMAINING CAPACITY = 0300MAHR

5700mAHR
BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE I / BEGINNING PHASE II
CASE 1 CASE 2
REMAINING CAPACITY = 5700MAHR REMAINING CAPACITY = 3400MAHR
BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE II / BEGINNING PHASE III
CASE 1 CASE 2
BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE III – “CHARGE COMPLETE”
CASE 1 CASE 2
The above CASE 1 and CASE 2 figures illustrate the three phase recharge concept. CASE 1
is an example of a nearly charged battery set (Phase I adds no bar segments) while CASE 2
is an example of a heavily discharged battery set. The equivalent capacity in mAHR is
given immediately beneath the bar graph depiction. Default values are assumed.
13-30
FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING
RECHARGE (GRAPHICAL)
Typical Non-Extended Charge Profile

For Significantly Discharged Battery Set
(Battery Voltage vs. Remaining Capacity and % Charge Displayed)
Capacity Remaining (in 100's of Milliampere Hours)
BATTERY VOLT-

Charge Percent Displayed (in %) &
AGE
CHARGE
COMPLETE
“FULL CHARGE EXCESS CAPAC-

ITY” IS ADDED AT “CHARGE COM-
PLETE”
% CHARGE ON BAR
GRAPH DISPLAY
CAPACITY REMAINING IN
100’S OF MILLIAMPHOURS
PHASE III
PHASE I PHASE II
TIME (Hours)
Illustration 13–12 demonstrates how both the % charge displayed on the bar graph capacity
gauge and the capacity remaining, increase during charge when starting with a significantly
discharged battery set. Note that neither parameter is increased until after the initial ramp–
up period.
13-31
13-22-4 Voltage Compensation
To guard against unusual usage, a circuit defect, or shorted battery cells, all of which may
cause a deviation from the current load model, voltage compensation is incorporated in the
SMART GAUGE algorithm. To accomplish this, the energy removed during each cycle
will be multiplied by a compensation factor as shown in the following table:
VOLTAGE RANGE FOR WHICH ...
... Compensation ... Compensation ... Compensation

CONDITION
Factor = 1 Factor = 2 Factor = 3
IDLE > 112.0V > 111.0V and < 112.0V < 111.0V
DRIVE > 110.5V > 109.5V and < 110.5V < 109.5V
FIELD LIGHT > 111.0V > 110.0V and < 111.0V < 110.0V
DRIVE and
> 109.5V > 108.5V and < 109.5V < 108.5V
FIELD LIGHT
The table above assumes the default condition of 11200 (2BC0 Hex) for the DATA BASE
parameter “Nominal 0% capacity Millivolts” which represents 112.00V. The important
item to note is that even with voltage compensation in effect, the bar graph (% capacity)
response will still be linear with usage. The bar graph will not fall off sharply as had been
the case with the previous capacity algorithm.
13-22-5 Diagnostic Aids
As shown in the following table, certain DAC voltage outputs are provided to aid manufac-
turing, field service, and systems evaluation engineering in monitoring the parameters
which drive the % capacity display with external measurement equipment.
Quantity To Be Quantity to Output Linear Re- AMX1A2A1

DAC Name
Output lationship Test Point #
110V = 0V output
Present Voltage KVP DEMAND TP26
140V = 10V output
0mAHR = 0V output
Remaining Capacity FIL CUR DEMAND TP27
10000mAHR = 10V output
Bar Graph 0% = 0V output LEAKAGE COMP

TP28
Percentage 100% = 10V output DEMAND
These diagnostic outputs will be available except in the x–ray mode when the DAC’s are
used for their intended purposes. The Charge Profile illustration in this section was gener-
ated by monitoring these test points during charge.
13-22-6 Battery Aging
To guard against the adverse effects of aging batteries on high voltage generator perform-
ance, a battery aging algorithm is incorporated to reduce the capacity available over the
range of the bar graph display as described in Section 13-22-1. If battery aging is effecting
the system high voltage performance, the DATA BASE parameter “Battery Aging Capacity
Offset” will begin to increase. It is limited to 70% of the value of the DATA BASE parame-
ter “Total Capacity”. Relatively new battery sets may also activate this algorithm if a
shorted cell(s) is present.
13-32
If a customer begins to complain about “Capacity Problems”, an inspection of the “Battery

Aging Capacity Offset” DATA BASE parameter should be made using DATA BASE AC-
CESS to see if the algorithm has been activated. Note: This feature can be disabled by writ-
ing 0000 to the “Battery Aging Disable” DATA BASE parameter.
IMPORTANT: Loading Defaults in the calibration mode does not zero the Battery Aging
Capacity Offset" DATA BASE parameter, because batteries are not always
replaced prior to Re-Calibrating a system. Therefore always inspect and
zero this parameter any time battery sets or individual batteries are replaced.
13-23 Heat Storage Tube Protection

The new application firmware simulates the actual target temperature. It does not generate
a heat wait after each exposure like the previous firmware. It only generates a heat wait for
heat storage technique selection greater than the track on bulk limits.
13-24 Service Mode

This mode of operation is intended to be used only by a service person. It can only be en-
tered only with the use of the service switch. The service mode consists of three functions:
calibration, extended diagnostics and data base access. These functions are described be-
low.
13-25 Calibration
To enter the calibration mode, the unit must be powered–up with the service switch in the
service mode position. Once power–up testing is complete, the “CALIBRATE SYSTEM”
function must be selected. At this point the following items can be calibrated.
13-25-1 Drive Handle Calibration
The Handle Is The Only Portion Of The Drive system that requires calibration. The calibra-
tion is basically in two parts. First the “no force” transducer output is determined. Next the
transducer output at full forward and full reverse handle displacement is determined for
both the left and right channels. From these the magnet polarity and input gains can be de-
termined.
13-25-2 Battery Charger Calibration
During charger calibration, the AMX4 “learns” the relationship between the charge current
command and the charge current feedback both for high charge and trickle charge. To do
this the AMX 4 calibration firmware outputs two different charge commands and saves the
charge current feedback for these points in the data base. From these values in the data base,
the expected feedback at any charge command can be interpolated. The AMX 4 also
“learns” the relationship between charge current command and actual charging current.
The serviceperson is involved in this step since he enters the voltage across the charging
current limit resistor. The value which is saved in the data base is:
value = 2.5 ohms entered voltage 1000

The actual charging current is determined at two charge commands. This allows the actual
charging current to be interpolated for any charge command.
13-33
13-25-3 Battery Voltmeter Calibration
During this calibration step, the AMX 4 “learns” the relationship between actual battery
voltage and the frequency of the VCO which monitors battery voltage. To do this, the AMX
4 counts battery voltage pulses for 5 seconds and then prompts the operator to enter the ac-
tual battery voltage. From this information a counts–per–volt ratio can be determined and
stored in the data base.
13-25-4 Generator Calibration
This calibration step is divided into four parts as shown below. It is assumed that the battery
voltage calibration has been done properly.
13-25-5 mAs Calibration
The Illustration 13–13 shows the mAs calibration circuitry.
During mAs calibration approximately 100 mA is injected into the mA metering circuitry
which is based on a Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO). The resulting frequency clocks
the counter for a set period of time (3 seconds). As a result, the number of VCO pulses per
mAs is given by:
counts per mAs = counter contents (injected mA) (3 sec)

13-25-6 kVp Calibration
This calibration step calibrates the AMX 4 to the particular bleeder/meter combination be-
ing used for measurement. During this step the AMX 4 “learns” the relationship between
kVp demand and actual kVp. The service person monitors the kVp on an oscilloscope and
enters the kVp value when the AMX 4 requests it. Calibration is done at 4 points – 52, 64, 85
and 120 kVp
MAS CALIBRATION CIRCUIT
+V
100 mA
mA
l emiss
P
R
O
16 BIT C
COUNTER E
VCO
S
S
O
R
13-34
13-25-7 Tap Relay Calibration
This is the longest calibration step, but it is fully automated. All the service person is re-
quired to do is hold down the prep and expose switches. The purpose of Tap Calibration is to
define the system characteristics of as many of the 28 valid tap combinations as possible.
Starting at no taps selected, the AMX 4 determines which two kVp’s yield emission cur-
rents of 90 and 110 mA for each tap combination. The Illustration 13–14 shows the informa-
tion that is gathered from this cal.
For each tap combination two parameters are stored in the data base; the System Resistance
which is the slope of the tap combination load line, and the Effective Turns Ratio which is
the y–intercept (kVp at 0mA) divided by the battery voltage.
13-25-8 Filament Current (X–ray Tube

Characteristics) Calibration
Filament current demand is calibrated at four kVp station: 52, 64, 85 and 120 kVp. For each
kVp station two tap combinations are used – the ones that will yield emission currents clos-
est to 90mA and 110mA.
Linear interpolation is used to determine the filament current demand values at 90 and 110 mA
for each kVp station. These eight calibrated points are then used to interpolate the remaining
filament current table entries in the data base as shown in Table 13–1.
KVP VERSUS MA
EMISSION CURRENT (mA)
K5, K3, K2, K1
K5, K3, K2
kVp
K5, K3, K1
K2, K1
K2
NO TAPS K1
OPEN 90 110
13-35
TABLE 13–1
FILAMENT CURRENT TABLE ENTRIES
90 mA 100 mA kVp
extrapolated extrapolated 50
calibrated calibrated 52
interpolated interpolated 54

extrapolated extrapolated 125
Obtaining the correct filament current demand at each of the eight calibration points is done
as follows:
1. The filament current used for the first exposure at a new calibration point is based on
data collected during tap calibration.
2. When an exposure is taken, the filament current feedback “error” (indicative of kVp
error) is integrated. This integrated error and its polarity determines how much the
filament current must be adjusted.
3. If the integrated error is greater than the maximum allowable error then take another
exposure with the new filament current of step 2 above.
4. Repeat steps 2 & 3 until the error is within limits.
13-25-9 Field Light On Time Calibration
This calibration step allows the field light “ON” time to be calibrated. Valid times are any-
where from 5 to 45 seconds.
13-26 Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools
This portion of the service mode is intended to assist the service representative in trouble–
shooting. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access to these tests.
13-27 Data Log Access
This portion of the service mode allows access to the history of the unit. It is password pro-
tected to prevent unauthorized access.
13-28 Data Base Access
This portion of the service mode allows the service representative to view and change data
base elements. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access.
13-36
SECTION 14
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS
14-1 Isolating Battery Problems
Battery problems manifest themselves in a multitude of manners. Some potential symp-

toms are:
1. Error 465 may appear during longer exposures (>50 ms). This error occurs
when the battery voltage drop during an exposure is significantly greater than
what it was during TAP CAL. New firmware versions don't display E-465 until
after 100 occurrences. They are logged, however, so inspecting the data log on a
regular basis is recommended.
2. Error 462 (excessive exposure time) may also indicate that the battery voltage
drop during an exposure is significantly greater than what it was during TAP
CAL.
3. The message BATTERY TOO LOW" RECHARGE REQUIRED" may apĆ
pear even though there is significant capacity left according to the bar graph.
4. The circuit breaker may blow or the AMX4 may reset itself. This may occur if the
voltage drops below 80V during exposure.
Important: Presence of one of the above symptoms does not justify replacing the batterĆ
ies. The state-of-health" of the batteries must first be determined. See beĆ
low.
14-1-1 Voltage Drop Under Load
The only reliable method for determining whether a battery set is bad is to monitor the bat-
tery voltage under load at a lower state–of–charge. The procedure follows.
1. Bring the open circuit battery voltage on the set to between 112V and 113.00V
unloaded. Drive the unit, use a lamp or some other type of load such as Service
Tool 46-302882 (110 Volt/1200 Watt AMX-4 Load Fixture)
2. Monitor the battery voltage from the circuit breaker to the ground stud with a
storage scope. Use 5 or 10V/div and 5 ms/div with negative edge trigger.
3. Take a 125 kVp 4 mAs exposure, getting the scope to trigger on the falling edge
of the battery voltage.
4. Note the average drop from the PREP load voltage to the voltage during expoĆ
sure. See Illustration 35, Voltage Drop Under Load.
14-1
ILLUSTRATION 14–1
VOLTAGE DROP UNDER LOAD
PREP LOAD
VOLTAGE
AVERAGE DROP
If the average drop is greater than 17 volts the batteries as a set are bad.
14-2 CPU Dip Switch Positions
PORT
SW NORMAL SW ADDR
# POSITiON NAME FUNCTION & BIT # COMMENTS
1 OFF – (NONE) –
3 OFF OPT ENABLES POWER 1100H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENABLES +24, +15 TESTS
SW 1 SUPPLY TESTS BIT 6 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = DISABLES +24, +15 TESTS
4 OFF BAUD SELECTS 1100H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = 375K BAUD RATE
RATE BAUD RATE BIT 5 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = 187.5K BAUD RATE
5 ON OPT (NOT USED) 1000H

SW 4 BIT 2
6 OFF–ENG OPT SELECTS LANGUAGE 1000H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENGLISH

ON–FREN SW 3 OF MESSAGE BIT 1 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = FRENCH
7 ON OPT CYCLES CPU 1400H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = CYCLE CPU AT POWER UP
SW 2 BIT 2 (SEE NOTE 1 BELOW)
ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = NORMAL RUN MODE
NOTE 1: Applicable ONLY to CPU board 46-264974, AND ONLY with PROMS 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later.
This function enables the CPU board to be recycled in the diagnostic mode by setting switch #7 OFF, placing
service mode switch down, and rebooting.
14-2
14-3 Generator Cal
The following three subsections will help with common problems which may occur during
generator calibration.
14-3-1 Tube Spits During

“CALIBRATE TAPS”
If you run into tube spits at high kVp’s during Tap Cal, try slowing the pace of the calibra-
tion once the kVp is greater than 125 kVp. That is, wait approximately 30 seconds between
exposures and keep the unit in prep longer by allowing the message “READY FOR X–
RAY” to be displayed for 5 seconds before pressing the expose switch.
14-3-2 X–ray Word Limit During

“CAL FIL CUR TBL”
If an “X–RAY WORD LIMIT” occurs during “CAL FIL CUR TBL” you can prevent the
unit from forcing a re–calibration of the entire unit by doing the
following:
1. With “X–RAY WORD LIMIT” still on the display press mAs until you get to the
“CALIBRATE GENERATOR” level. (DO NOT TURN OFF POWER OR PUSH
THE RESET SWITCH!)
2. Press mAs twice and redo the mAs calibration. This updates the appropriate check-
sums and prevents a forced recalibration of the active generator.
3. Redo “CAL FIL CUR TBL”.
14-3-3 Triggering – The Oscilloscope

Prior to “CALIBRATE kVp”
You can save time by making sure your oscilloscope triggers properly prior to entering
“CALIBRATE kVp”. If the unit fails Power–Up Test 04, you can use the checksum by–
pass feature to enter the application mode and take exposures. Use 50 kVp at 2 mAs to es-
tablish your trigger.
14-3
14-4 Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to

Capacity Displayed (Firmware 46–329187G1
and 46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2
and 46–329188G2 ONLY)
It is possible when servicing the AMX–4 to throw the internal capacity meter and the capac-
ity displayed out–of–sync. This can occur if the batteries are discharged a considerable
amount, say with the battery load fixture, followed by a volt meter calibration. If the
AMX–4 is then put in the application mode, the %capacity displayed will be low while the
internal capacity meter may still be quite high. Given this situation, it may take some time
for the internal capacity meter to “catch–up” with the % capacity displayed.
The reverse can happen if the batteries are charged outside of the application mode (or a
new battery set is installed), followed by a volt meter calibration. In this case the unit may
exhibit rapid bar graph fall off, while the % capacity displayed catches up with the internal
capacity meter which hasn’t changed since the last time application mode was active.
There are two remedies for these situations.
1. Charge the unit to “CHARGE COMPLETE”. This approach updates both the internal
capacity meter and the % displayed and will eventually synchronize the two.
2. Using the LOOP TEST diagnostic tool, write FF into location 0CB4. This approach
corrupts the internal capacity meter forcing a synchronization of internal capacity to
% capacity the next time the system is powered up in the applications mode.
Note: The displays will be blank for about 5 seconds while this synchronization takes
place.
14-4
SECTION 15
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
15-1 Illustration Listing
Illustration 15-1. X-Ray Enable Control

Illustration 15-2. X-ray Enable Preparation And Expose Sequence
Illustration 15-3. High Voltage Generation
Illustration 15-4. Filament And mAs Control
Illustration 15-5. Rotor Control
Illustration 15-6. Left Drive Signal Flow
Illustration 15-7. Right Drive Signal Flow
Illustration 15-8. Left & Right Drive Functional Flow
Illustration 15-9. Battery Power and Charging with Charger Board
46-288034 or 46-288786
Illustration 15-10. Battery Power Charge Cycle with Charger Board
46-288034 or 46-288786
Illustration 15-11. Battery Power Discharge Cycle with Charger Board
46-288034 or 46-288786
15-1
15-2
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–1
X–RAY ENABLE CONTROL
AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A3 A2
GEN
CONTROLLER J3 J1 ROTOR CONTROL
ROTOR SELECT*
CNTRL 2 9 9 SEE ILL. 15-5
1000H ROTOR
60HZ INV RELAY* CONTROL
GEN 11 11
SEE ILL. 15-2 CNTRL 1 60 Hz EN
FOR X-RAY ENABLE, 1200H
PREP SEQUENCE &
EXPOSE SEQUENCE 60HZ PHASE 1/ 60HZ
FLOW CHARTS PROG TMR 2 60HZ PHASE 2 INVERTER ROTOR DRIVE
TIMER DRI- 15 13 15 13
1500H VERS
+24V
GEN SAFETY CONT ENB*

CNTRL 2 10 10 K37 CURRENT
1000H DETECT
PREP SW ROTOR
12 12 DRIVE
J8
PREP SW PREP SW PREP SW
23 J4 J1
EXP SW EXP SW EXP SW
25 8 5 3
BU TMR
EXP OKAY SAFETY
BACKUP SEE ILL. 15-3 CONTACTOR
TIMER 60HZ ROTOR
1300H HIGH VOLTAGE INV INTLK
X-RAY A OK
HAND SWITCH N GENERATION
PRES SW AMX1 A4 A1 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
D +BATT
1 kHz INVERTER HV MODULE HV XFMR
J7 AEC
AEC EXP EN AEC EXP EN EXP EN
9 START SCR SAFETY
HI/LO CONTACTOR
8031 EXP A J4 EXP START CMND J1 START J4
MICRO- STOP* N 25 25 PULSE 11 13
CONTROLLER D GEN 2
N SCR
O
N T START
CRITICAL O EXP SCR
STATUS T START STOP SCR 1
090H + L ANODE
HI/LO -BATT SCR PRIMARY VOLTS+/ HV
EXP STOP CMND STOP XFMR C
P1.0 O 23 23 7 9 PRIMARY VOLTS-
PULSE STOP & S
R GEN SCR AUTO HV
P1.1 GEN XFMR RECTI- - X-RAY
J3 CNTRL 1 FIER
X-RAY PRES SW
6 P1.2 1200H
TUBE +24V
1 kHz COM CAP
ROTOR INTLK EN + -
3 P1.4 1 kHz PHASE 1/ 1/ 2
60HZ INV OK PROG TMR 0 1 kHz PHASE 2 1KHZ (HV DRIVE)
5 P1.3 TIMER DRI- 26 24 26 24
VERS INVERTER
1500H
J5 TAP J5 COIL
FIL SHORTED SELECTS SELECTS
25 P1.6 GEN 6 6
CNTRL 2 OPTO X-RAY
1000H ISO'S PRES
X-RAY ON
P1.7 STOP SW
1 kHz INVERTER READY J4 CAP
12 12 DETECT 16
P1.5 -70VDC
KV 60HZ ROTOR
FDBK J3 J6 PRIMARY VOLTS+/ INV INTLK
+/- RECT- PRIMARY VOLTS- OK
1 2 IFIER
X-RAY ON
INT1 SEE ILL. 15-4
FILAMENT / mAs AMX1 A4 A2
CONTROL J5 LEAKAGE FIL / KVP CONTROL
J5 LEAK COMP +/- J2 MA+ / MA-
MAS CMP DAC 3 4 3 4
21 PULSE
COUNTER 1481H J7
SEE ILL. BAT V &
15-9 MUX T1 1 2 DETECT SUM
BATTERY CHARGING J1 KV
POWER / CUR KVP KVP DMN +/- J2 75% OF
5
CHARGING DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 DEMAND
PWR 1584H
DOWN J8 S
RST* FIL FIL DMN +/- U L
PWR OK 10 DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 FILAMENT DRIVE FILA-
M C
1580H 2KHZ MENT
ON-BOARD INVERTER XFMR S
CNTRL 2 kHz PHASE 1/
1280H PROG TMR 0 2 kHz PHASE 2 CATHODE
LINE TIMER DRI- 17 19 17 19 VOLTAGE SHORT
SENSE J1 1500H VERS -TO- DETECT
6 FREQ
CHGR & DRV CONVERT
TUBE STATUS GEN 2 kHz EN 5-7 MS DELAY
SEE ILL. PARKED J8 1000H CNTRL 1
15-6 OR 15-7 SW 1200H PREHEAT PREHEAT
13 26 26 J2
VEHICLE
DRIVE
22 21 25
DISPLAY CONTROLLER X-RAY MAS FIL 60HZ ROTOR DISPLAY
ON SHORTED INV INTLK
J5 J6 J1 OK DS30
X-RAY ON SONALERT* LS85
22 DRI- 15 15 J2 XRAY ON
X-RAY ON LAMP* SONALERT X-RAY ON LAMP* J1
VERS
9 9 17 17
15-3
15-4
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–2
X–RAY ENABLE PREPARATION 1 ENABLE X-RAY MODE 2 PREP SEQUENCE 3 EXPOSE SEQUENCE
AND EXPOSE SEQUENCE
PREP SEQUENCE EXP SEQUENCE
PREP SW PRESSED &

TUBE NOT PARKED EXPOSE SW PRESSED
(FROM ENABLE
START X-RAY MODE)
ARE X-RAYS CHECK INTERLOCKS: ASSERT EXP START CMND

INHIBITED? VERIFY DATA BASE
CHECKSUM
MAKE SURE THE FOLLOW-
X-RAYS INHIBITED IF: ING CRITICAL STATUS EXPOSURE BEGINS.
BAT V < 112 VDC SIGNALS ARE OK:
- X-RAY PRES SW FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD
BACKUP TIMER EXPIRED X-RAYS - 60HZ INV OK DETECTS HV AND ASSERTS
ON LAST EXPOSURE INHIBITED - ROTOR INTLK X-RAY ON.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED - 1 kHz INVERTER READY X-RAY ON KICKS OFF THE
LINE SENSE DETECTED - FIL SHORTED FOLLOWING EVENTS:
ON POWER-UP - X-RAY ON
VERIFY THAT NO HV STARTS BACKUP TIMER
PREP OR EXPOSE SWITCH AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS
DETECTED ON POWER-UP TRIGGERS 8031 uC INT1,
ARE SELECTED STARTING MAS PULSE
X-RAYS NOT VERIFY BACKUP TIMER COUNTER
INHIBITED STATUS SOUNDS SONALERT
AMX1 A1 A2 LIGHTS X-RAY ON LAMP
IS HEAT WAIT YES DISPLAY
REQUIRED? START ROTOR BY ASSERTING
HEAT WAIT THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS:
8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL
ROTOR SELECT* DATA (SEE 2-2-1, FILAMENT /
NO mAs CONTROL)
60HZ INV RELAY*
60 Hz EN
IS PREP SW NO
PRESSED? 8031 uC CONTINUOUSLY
CHECKS INTERLOCKS
BOOST FILAMENT BY ASSERT-
YES ING THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS:
AMX1 A1 A2 PREHEAT
WHEN MAS PULSE COUNT =
IS TUBE YES DISPLAY 2 kHz EN OPERATOR'S mAs INPUT,
PARKED? 8031 uC ASSERTS EXP STOP
TUBE PARKED CMND.
OUTPUT KVP DMN VALUE EXPOSURE STOPS.

NO BASED ON OPERATOR'S
kVp INPUT
TURN OFF 1KHZ & 2KHZ

INVERTERS
OUTPUT LEAKAGE COMP
VALUE AS CALCULATED FROM
GO TO PREP SEQ DATA BASE
UPDATE FIL DMN DATA BASE
USING AUTO CAL INFO
OUTPUT FIL DMN VALUE
BASED ON:
OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT TURN OFF ROTOR & HV AUTO
SAMPLED BAT V LEVEL XFMR RELAY TAPS
AUTO CAL DATA BASE
WAIT FOR RELEASE OF PREP

PREPARE FOR HIGH VOLTAGE: SWITCH
ASSERT SAFETY CONT ENB

SELECT HV AUTO XFMR
RELAY TAPS
ASSERT 1 kHz EN
LOAD EXP BACKUP TIMER EXIT
INITIALIZE MAS PULSE
COUNTER
AMX1 A1 A2
DISPLAY
READY FOR X-RAY
GO TO EXP SEQ
15-5
ssssss

15-6
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–3
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION
SEE ILL. 15-9 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
BATTERY HV MODULE HV XFMR
POWER / CHARGING PRIMARY
-BATT -BATT START VOLTS-
SCR SCR P2
START SCR HI/LO START SCR HI/LO K6

AMX2 A3
BATTERIES STOP CAP STOP CAP (STOP CHARGE = -70V)
COM CAP CHARGE - STOP K5

SCR
SEE ILL. 15-1 SEE ILL. 15-5 COM
CAP COM
X-RAY ENABLE ROTOR RECT- CAP
CONTROL CONTROL IFIER C2
COM CAP CHARGE RTN K4
+
STOP SCR HI/LO STOP SCR HI/LO
SAFETY CONTACTOR SAFETY CONTACTOR L ANODE
AUTO + C
XFMR HV HV
T1 RECTI- S
+BATT +BATT XFMR
T1 FIER
-
SAFETY
CONTACTOR X-RAY
K7 TUBE
K3
K2
AMX1 A1 A2 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A1

DISPLAY CONTROLLER 1 kHz INVERTER
J4 1 kHz K1
+24V PHASE 2 J1 J4 2
kVp S43 KVP 24 24 1
J1 J6
UP DRI-
34 11 PROG TMR 0 VERS 1 kHz PRIMARY
TIMER
S44 KVP
DOWN
OPER I/O
STATUS 1500H 16 XFMR
T120 SCR
VOLTS+
P1
32 13 1400H 1 kHz
PHASE 1 1
26 26 5
GEN SEE ILL. 15-4
1 kHz EN
CNTRL 1 FILAMENT / mAs
1200H J5 CONTROL
TAP 6* K6 COIL
8 8 4
TAP 5* K5 COIL FILAMENT L
10 10 5
OPTO DRI- C
6 TAP 4* 6 ISO'S 6 VERS 6 K4 COIL XFMR
GEN 14 14 6 T2
CNTRL 2 S
TAP 3* K3 COIL
1000H 16 16 7 CATHODE
TAP 2* K2 COIL
18 18 8
TAP 1* K1 COIL
20 20 9
8031 TAP 6 FDBK

MICRO- 7 7
CONTROLLER TAP 5 FDBK
9 9 OPTO
6 TAP 4 FDBK 6 ISO'S 6
GEN & AEC 13 13
STATUS TAP 3 FDBK
CRITICAL 1600H 15 15
STATUS TAP 2 FDBK
090H 17 17
PREP SW TAP 1 FDBK
P1.0 19 19
EXP SW 20:1 J6 PRIMARY VOLTS-
P1.1
KV FDBK +/- J3 KV 1
HAND RECT- FDBK
1 2 IFIER XFMR PRIMARY VOLTS+
SWITCH T25 3
SEE ILL. 15-1

X-RAY ENABLE AMX1 A4 A2
CONTROL FIL / KVP CONTROL
A/D KV FDBK +/- J7
CNTRL
POAD0- 1280H 1 2 AMP
POAD7
KVP DMN
J5 FBK +/- J2 DETECT
A/D ANA- J2 X-RAY ON SEE ILL. 15-1
NVRAM CONVERT 13 14 13 14 AMP KV
DATA LOG 75% OF 22 X-RAY ENABLE
BASE 1200H MUX DEMAND CONTROL
D0-D7 DATA BUS KVP DMN +/-

KVP
DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP
1584H
DETECT J6
KV>15KV TRIP BRKR* SEE ILL. 15-9
8031 uC READS OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT AND SETS 2
AUTO XFMR TAPS & KVP DEMAND DAC ACCORDINGLY ABOVE BATTERY
DEMAND POWER / CHARGING
15-7
15-8
ILLUSTRATION 15–4
FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL
AMX1 A1 A2
DISPLAY
+24V AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A2
mAs S45 J1 MAS J6 CONTROLLER FIL / KVP CONTROL
UP
31 5 FIL DMN +/-
MAS
D0-D7 DATA BUS FIL J5 J2 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
S46
DOWN DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 AMP HV MODULE HV XFMR
33 7 1580H X-RAY
OPER I/O TUBE
kVp S43 KVP STATUS CHOKE
UP KVP DMN +/- S PWM J8 PWM E PWM L
1400H MODU-
34 11 KVP U POWER 3 XC
KVP DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP M LATOR L3
S44 AMP
DOWN 1584H
32 13 8 AMP
CURRENT
GEN PREHEAT PREHEAT LIMIT
CNTRL 1 26 26
1200H 2 kHz EN CURRENT
DETECT
TMR 0 16 kHz CLK FILAMENT S
PROG 15 15
TIMER XFMR C
1500H T2 L
DRI- 2 kHz
VERS PHASE 1 J5 PWM RTN 1 PWM RTN 1 CATHODE
17 17 BUF FET 1 XS1
8 2 kHz
PHASE 2 PWM RTN 2 PWM RTN 2
19 19 BUF FET 3 XS2
FIL FDBK +/- FIL SEE ILL. 15-1

J2 SHORTED
AMP SHORT X-RAY ENABLE
9 10 9 10 DETECT 25
CONTROL
8031
MICRO-
CONTROLLER AMX1 A4 A1
1 kHz INVERTER
A/D J6
ANA- 20:1
CONVERT J7 KV FDBK +/- J3 3
1200H LOG KV
RECT-
MUX AMP 1 2 1 2 IFIER FDBK
XFMR 1
CRITICAL LEAKAGE T25
STATUS COMP
090H FDBK +/-
PREP SW
P1.0 A/D 5 6 5 6 AMP SEE ILL. 15-3
5-7 mS X-RAY
EXP SW CNTRL DELAY ON HIGH VOLTAGE
P1.1 1280H LEAKAGE GENERATION
COMP +/-
HAND LEAK
SWITCH CMP DAC 3 4 3 4 AMP AMX1 A4
1481H HV MODULE
PRIMARY
SEE ILL. 15-1 ON-BOARD VOLTS+
CNTRL AUTO P1 HV HV -
X-RAY ENABLE 1280H PRIMARY RECTI- L ANODE
CONTROL XFMR XFMR
PULSE 100MA = 16kHz VOLTAGE T1 VOLTS- T1 FIER + C
COUNTER MAS NOMINAL -TO- S P2
21 21 U S
T1 MUX FREQ
CONVERT M
POAD0- J3 MA+ MA J2 MA+
POAD7 1 FDBK 1 MA+
NVRAM RECT- MA- XFMR MA- SAMPLE
DATA DURING EXPOSURE, FIL/KVP IFIER 2 T2 3 MA-
BASE CONTROL BOARD DRIVES
FIL CURRENT UNTIL
KV FDBK = KV DMN
DURING PREP SEQUENCE, 8031 uC SETS UP DAC'S:
- SETS UP FIL DEMAND DAC BASED ON: J6 TRIP
* OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION DETECT BRKR* SEE ILL. 15-9
>150MA 2
* BATTERY VOLTAGE BATTERY
* CALCULATED EMISSION CURRENT AS DETER- POWER / CHARGING
MINED BY CAL DATA BASE
- SETS KVP DEMAND DAC TO A UNIQUE VALUE
FOR EACH OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION
(THIS FINE-TUNES kVp AUTO XFMR TAP
SELECTIONĊSEE ILL. 15-3, HIGH VOLTAGE GEN)
- SETS UP LEAKAGE COMP DAC TO COMPENSATE
FOR HV TANK LEAKAGEĊOTHERWISE MA
VALUE WOULD APPEAR TO BE HIGHER THAN
IT ACTUALLY IS. DAC VALUE BASED ON:
* OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION
* CAL DATA BASE
DURING EXPOSE SEQUENCE, 8031 uC COLLECTS
AUTO CAL DATA:
- READS FIL FDBK
- READS LEAKAGE COMP FDBK
- READS KVP DMN FDBK (SEE ILL . 15-3, HV GEN)
TO END EXPOSURE, 8031 uC COUNTS MAS PULSES.
WHEN PULSE COUNT = OPERATOR-SELECTED mAs,
EXPOSURE TERMINATES. (SEE ILL. 15-1, X-RAY
ENABLE CONTROL.)
AFTER EXPOSURE, 8031 uC UPDA TES AUTO CAL
DATA BASE
15-9
15-10
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–5
ROTOR CONTROL
AMX1 A3
ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE
COLL LAMP TRANS
A3T2
TO COLL
FIELD LAMP
A3F7
SEE ILL. 15-9 J6 1 J6 2

BATTERY KEY ROTOR CONTROL
POWER / CHARGING SWITCH BATTERY CHARGER
KEY ROTOR PHASE
SWITCH DRIVE K39 SHIFT
T1 PHASE 2 XFMR CAP PHASE
J2 PHASE
T1 SHIFT E C1 SHIFT L
FET 6 J3 J7
AMX2 A3 100 VAC (ROTOR 1)
3 2
BATTERIES +BATT T1 PRI COM T6 (GRN)
X-RAY
K215 SWITCHED J8 K121 F93 TUBE
- + T1 SEC
2 3 J4 ROTOR COMM (WHT)
COM
2 3
T1 PHASE 1
-BATT
1 FET 1 (BLK)
ROTOR 2
4
B-
T5
J1 ROTOR
AMX1 A2 A1 CURRENT INTLK
DETECT 3
D0-D7 CONTROLLER J3
60HZ INV
J1 SEE ILL. 15-1
DATA RELAY*
BUS GEN 11 11 X-RAY ENABLE
27 VAC OPTO 60HZ CONTROL
HAND 8031 CNTRL 1 60 Hz EN 6 ISO INV OK
MICRO- 27 VAC RECT-
SWITCH CONTROLLER
1200H 60HZ RTN IFIER
5
J8 PHASE 1 1 7
PREP SW 15 15
23 P1.0 J4 COM CAP
DRI- OPTO DRI- CHARGE
PROG VERS 80 VAC
CRITICAL TMR 2 ISO'S VERS 8 2 SEE ILL. 15-3
STATUS
090H
TIMER
1500H 2 60HZ
PHASE 2
80 VAC
RTN
COM CAP
CHARGE RTN HIGH VOLTAGE
2 9 1 GENERATION
13 13
SEE ILL. 15-1
X-RAY ENABLE ROTOR
CONTROL GEN SELECT*
CNTRL 2 9 9
1000H
WHEN OPERATOR PRESSES PREP SWITCH, 8031 uC

ENABLES 60HZ INVERTER & ROTOR SELECT RELAYSĊ
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR MOTION BEGINS.
15-11
15-12
ILLUSTRATION 15–6
LEFT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW
AMX1 A5 A2 AMX1 A5
DRIVE POWER AMP MOTOR DRIVE
AMX1 A2 MODULE
TOP DECK HALL LFT LEFT
J1 REF J8 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A5 A1 J1 V+ K1 F1
3 7 CONTROLLER DRIVE CONTROL 2
HALL LFT REF +10V REF
RTN SUPPLY
5 8 LEFT
J9 LEFT TOP J9 VM+
CW* OPTO
HALL LFT MAN TDS REF OUT LEFT DRV ISO POWER RED
OUT 4 4 1
EFFECT CMND +/- FET
MAG- 4 3 ANA- A/D LFT SPD J2 J2
NET SENSOR
S3 LOG CONVERT DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 AMP VOLTAGE
MUX 1200H 1401H S VOLT- -TO- DRI-
U AGE PULSE VERS
M CLAMP WIDTH
CONVERT
A/D LEFT BOT LEFT
CNTRL LEFT DRV CW* VM-
1280H POWER BLK
FDBK +/- 8 8 FET 3
3 4 3 4 LEFT
HANDLE AMP
DIRECT-
CW MOTOR
ASSM TION CCW AMX2 A1
DETECT MTR1
LEFT LEFT TOP
CCW* OPTO
7 7 ISO POWER
DRI- FET
VERS
LEFT BOT
D0-D7 CCW* POWER
3 3 FET
DATA
8031 BUS
MICRO- LEFT
CONTROLLER IM+
5 5
ANA-
SEE ILL. 15-7 LOG LEFT
VEHICLE MUX IM-
DRIVE 2 2
SEE ILL. PWR
(RIGHT) 15-9 OK J11
BATTERY
POWER / 3
A +5V DRV
LEFT RIGHT CHARGING N
NOT 9 9
DRIVE DRIVE D
ENA ENA DRIVE
S5 SW S4 SW J1 ENA SW DRIVE J2 DRIVE J4 DRIVE
J8 ENA SW ENA SW ENA
1 27 17 17 17 17 1
FULL
TUBE SPD ENA
TS2 PARKED 13 13
S1 SW CHGR DRIVE STALL LEFT MOTOR LEFT
1 13 CHGR ENA PWR*
& & RESET RESET* 3
TUBE DRV 15 15 INV DRI- 12 12 INV
LINE J1 DRV VERS
+24V PARKED SENSE CONTROL MOTOR BRAKE
SW 6 STATUS 1100H RELEASE
1000H ENA
16 16 14 14 INV
SEE ILL. LEFT
15-9 STALL STALL
14 14
NORMALLY BATTERY DETECT +BATT
OPEN POWER / SWITCHED J10 K145
CHARGING 2
S1: SEE ILL.
CLOSED = PARKED DS285 J11 15-9 -BATT J7
N.O. = NOT PARKED BUMPER #1 BATTERY 1
1 POWER /
BUMPER* O
S4 & S5: 10 10 CHARGING
R BUMPER #2
BOTH SWITCHES 2
MUST CLOSE FOR 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT: B-
FORWARD, REVERSE - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY J10 J5
OR PIVOT MOTION. HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING,
(PROVIDES A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & 1 1
REDUNDANT DEAD- OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO LFT SPD
DMN DAC BUMPER* = TRUE (0V) +BATT +BATT
MAN'S SWITCH.")
- IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS
FULL SPD ENA.
IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES
FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%.
- IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE),
8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE BRAKE RELEASE 1
TUBE
- IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS PARKED
REVERSE MOTION ONLY SW
- IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR
DRIVE. HANDLE
RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE
RESETS STALL DETECT.
AMX2 A2
FRONT BASE
LEFT
BRAKE S1 BUMPER
RELEASE BUMPER
BUTTON RIGHT
S2 BUMPER
+BATT LEFT BRAKE

SOLENOID
AMX2 A1 BRK1
S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE DRIVE
BRAKE RELEASE
WHEEL
15-13
15-14
ILLUSTRATION 15–7
RIGHT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A5 A2 AMX1 A5
DRIVE POWER AMP MOTOR DRIVE
AMX1 A2 MODULE
TOP DECK HALL RGT RIGHT
J2 REF J8 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A5 A1 J2 V+ K2 F2
3 5 CONTROLLER DRIVE CONTROL 2
HALL RGT REF +10V REF
RTN SUPPLY
5 6 RIGHT
J9 RIGHT TOP J9 VM+
CW* OPTO
HALL RGT MAN TDS REF OUT RIGHT DRV ISO POWER RED
OUT 23 23 3
EFFECT CMND +/- FET
MAG- 4 1 ANA- A/D RT SPD J2 J2
NET SENSOR
S2 LOG CONVERT DMN DAC 6 5 6 5 AMP VOLTAGE
MUX 1200H 1400H S VOLT- -TO- DRI-
U AGE PULSE VERS
M CLAMP WIDTH
CONVERT
A/D RIGHT BOT RIGHT
CNTRL RIGHT DRV CW* VM-
1280H POWER BLK
FDBK +/- 19 19 FET 1
1 2 1 2 RIGHT
HANDLE AMP
DIRECT-
CW MOTOR
ASSM TION CCW AMX2 A1
DETECT MTR2
RIGHT RIGHT TOP
CCW* OPTO
22 22 ISO POWER
DRI- FET
VERS
RIGHT BOT
D0-D7 CCW* POWER
24 24 FET
DATA
8031 BUS
MICRO- RIGHT
CONTROLLER IM+
20 20
ANA-
SEE ILL. 15-6 LOG RIGHT
VEHICLE MUX IM-
DRIVE SEE ILL. PWR 26 26
(LEFT) 15-9 OK
J11
BATTERY
POWER / 3
A +5V DRV
LEFT RIGHT CHARGING N
NOT 9 9
DRIVE DRIVE D
ENA ENA DRIVE
S5 SW S4 SW J1 ENA SW DRIVE J2 DRIVE J4 DRIVE
J8 ENA SW ENA SW ENA
1 27 17 17 17 17 1
FULL
TUBE SPD ENA
TS2 PARKED 13 13
S1 SW CHGR DRIVE STALL RIGHT MOTOR RIGHT
1 13 CHGR ENA PWR*
& & RESET RESET* 2
DRV 15 15 INV DRI- 11 11 INV
TUBE LINE J1 DRV VERS
+24V PARKED SENSE CONTROL MOTOR BRAKE
6 STATUS 1100H RELEASE
SW 1000H ENA
16 16 14 14 INV
SEE ILL. RIGHT
15-9 STALL STALL
12 12
NORMALLY BATTERY DETECT +BATT
POWER / SWITCHED J10 K145
OPEN CHARGING 2
SEE ILL.
S1: DS289 J11 15-9 -BATT J7
BUMPER #1 BATTERY 1
CLOSED = PARKED 1
N.O. = NOT PARKED BUMPER* POWER /
10 10 O CHARGING B-
R BUMPER #2
S4 & S5: 2
BOTH SWITCHES 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT:
MUST CLOSE FOR - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY J10 J6
FORWARD, REVERSE HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING,
BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & 1 1
OR PIVOT MOTION. OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO RT SPD
(PROVIDES A DMN DAC BUMPER* = TRUE (0V) +BATT +BATT
REDUNDANT DEAD-
MAN'S SWITCH.") - IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS
FULL SPD ENA.
IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES
FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%.
- IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE),
8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE BRAKE RELEASE 2
TUBE
- IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS PARKED
REVERSE MOTION ONLY SW
- IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR
DRIVE. HANDLE
RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE
RESETS STALL DETECT.
AMX2 A2
FRONT BASE
LEFT
BRAKE S1 BUMPER
RELEASE BUMPER
BUTTON RIGHT
S2 BUMPER
+BATT RIGHT BRAKE

SOLENOID
AMX2 A1 BRK2
S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE DRIVE
BRAKE RELEASE
WHEEL
15-15
15-16
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–8
LEFT & RIGHT DRIVE FUNCTIONAL FLOW
+5V-DRV DRIVE CONTROLLER TP16

NOTE: RIGHT AND LEFT DRIVE CIRCUITS ARE THE SAME.
GOES HIGH (STALL) NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS IS FOR RIGHT DRIVE CIRCUIT
(19)IF TP1 GETS MORE
AMX IV DRIVE CIRCUITRY
DRIVE POWER NEGATIVE THAN
AMP -8V + –8 VOLTS (10A) FAST STALL REV B
MUST HAVE
+5V–DRV - COMPARATOR
+ BATT TO ENABLE
64A 8A SWITCHE HIGH SIDE GOES HIGH
NORMALLY 0 VOLTS.
D FETS (STALL)
WILL START TO RISE
-5V IF TP1 GETS MORE
IF TP3 GETS
DS285 IF STALL IS
GREATER
NEGATIVE THAN –5 (289) HIGH, LED
THAN
TP17
VOLTS (6.25A) WILL BE ON
+ TP3 +10 VOLTS
(18)
(6) +10V
AND ERROR
F9 F1(2) WILL OCCUR
K1(2)
+ LATCH STALL
BATTERY HIGH HIGH
A B DELAYED STALL
- - CLR STALL OUTPUT OF
CONTROLLER
CHARGE COMPARATOR
INTEGRATOR BOARD
PANEL LOW LOW PULSE WILL
A B CLEAR DIR
STALL RESET
TP1 LATCH
TP4
(2)
(9) FALL DELAY TO HIGH SIDE
-3.98 +/-1 CLOCK
FET A
–8 VOLTS/ COMPARATOR
TP15 10.9
.2 OHMS AMP SELECT- (20) KHZ FALL DELAY
ABLE TO LOW SIDE
DIF FEEDBACK
F
AMP + DIR LOGIC FET A
K1(2)
R1(2) MUX AMP5 - (.5 X TP4) - FALL DELAY TO HIGH SIDE
TP5 FET B
DYMANIC BRAKE RESISTOR
X 10 (10)
.2 OHMS
LEVEL FALL DELAY TO LOW SIDE
SHIFT- FET B
ER +
VOLTAGE TO
- ERROR +/-1 PULSE WIDTH
K1(2) DIF
TP7 + CONVERTER
(8) SELECT-
DRIVE CON- F SHOULD BE 8.7 VOLTS FALLING EDGE DELAY
X 6.25 ABLE WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS HIGH
TACTOR AM PREVENTS HIGH AND LOW
AMP AND 4.2 VOLTS WHEN FULL
P SIDE FETS FROM BEING ON
+ BATT 1 STALL TP11 SPD ENA IS LO. HAS CAPACI- AT THE SAME TIME AND DE-
SWITCHE TOR DELAY. CLAMPS VOTAGE STROYING THEMSELVES
PWR OK
D K145 INTO PULSE WIDTH CONVERT-
BRAKE
FET (FROM BATT
ER FULL SPD ENA THESE OUTPUTS ARE INVERTED
SWITCH CHARGE BY THE FET DRIVERS, THUS A
K145 BOARD)
SHORTS TO DRIVE ENA SW +5V-DRV LOW WILL TURN ON THE FET.
GND
WHEN DRIVE
IS NOT EN-
ABLED
DRV FBK SHOULD

HALL OUTPUT WILL
BE DRV FBK DRIVE COMMAND -10 TO 10V
RANGE FROM ABOUT 3
5 VOLTS WHEN TP19 (18)
TO 7 VOLTS. THIS IS
THE UNIT IS NOT
TRANSLATED INTO A –10
MOVING. IT DATA
TO +10 VOLT COMMAND
SHOULD MOVE BASE D/A
BY THE SOFTWARE TP15 BELOW 5 VOLTS PIN 25
IN ONE DI- (26)
HALL 3 RECTION AND
EFFECT RED +10V
ABOVE REF
5 VOLTS TP22 MOTOR ENA BUMPER SWITCHES:
SENSOR IN THE OTHER. (21) MUX CLOSE WHEN OBJECT
4 U342 SAMPL A/D
SOFTWARE U151-3 IS HIT
WHT HOLD CONTROL BUMPER
X1
U151-4(7)
5 STALL
BLK U264-6
TP29 PORTS STALL RESET
U264-19
FULL SPD ENA
10 V
SQUARE WAVE
HANDLE CHECK 24mS ONLY WHEN ENABLE
SMALL BLACK 1mS BAR IS ENGAGED U151-13
CONNECTOR OUT DRIVE ENA SW ENABLE BAR SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN DRIVE IS
OTHERWISE CONSTANT
OF HANDLE ENDS WHEN THE ENABLE BAR IS EN- 10V ERROR CODES U151-18 ENABLED
GAGED, THIS SIGNAL FORCES THE TUBE PARKED SW PARK SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN TUBE IS PARKED
HALL EFFECT
SIGNAL INTO THE MUX TO BE 0 +24V
CPUVOLTS FOR A SHORT TIME. THE +24V
SOFTWARE CHECKS TO SEE THAT
THIS OCCURS (SAFETY FEATURE)
15-17
15-18
ssssss

ILLUSTRATION 15–9
BATTERY POWER AND CHARGING, WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BATT
(NEWER
UNITS) FAN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
BATTERY CHARGER +BATT
BAT
F1 CHOKE 117 VAC J5 K150 J11 CHARGE+ F4 CB1 CB1 F10
T3 +BATT
1 + SCR 1
L2 8A 64A
110 VAC F55
3 RECT- F6
IFIER
145 VDC
BLK BAT
F2 NEUTRAL REGULATOR CHARGE-
CORD WH
5 - 4 C + B + + + +
REEL GRN B B R B B B B
1 A E A A A A
117 VAC FRAME T A T T T T
60 Hz GROUND B T K T T T T
PHASE RAMP A E
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
AMX1 A2 A1 O BATTERIES
CONTROLLER P +
C
LINE K-LINE2 O E
J1 SENSE J1 K216 +24V TO K196 M N BRAKE DRIVE
CHGR & DRV
STATUS P * RELEASE MOTORS
6 6 A BUTTON
1000H
R
I-CHARGE E SAFETY
CHARGE CMND CONTACTOR
CUR DAC 3 3 SEE ILL. 15-5 OR 15-6
1480H VEHICLE SEE ILL. 15-3
I-CHARGE AMP DRIVE HIGH VOLTAGE
D0-D7 RTN S
U I-CHARGE GENERATION
DATA BUS 4 4 FBK- -
8031 M
MICRO- 8
TIMES 0.8 - - -
CONTROLLER B B B
OR AMP I-CHARGE
TIMES 8 A A A
VOLTAGE FBK+ T T T
-TO- AMP
9 F5 T T T
FREQ -BATT -BATT -BATT
CONVERT
7.8 kHz CB1
BAT V & J2 BATT
PULSE CHARGING +/- 25% B-
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR ANA-
MUX 5 5 +BATT
T1 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
4.6 kHz MUX K215 K196 LINE2
+/- 35% ROTOR
@ 0.5V CONTROL
SEE ILLS. 15-10 & 15-11 I-CHRG,
FOR DETAILED CHARGE & ON-BOARD AMP BAT SWT +BATT +BATT
DISCHARGE CYCLE CIRCUIT CNTRL @X8 (+BATT SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
OPERATION 1280H 9
KEY -
SWITCH +24V B
OPERATOR ON K62 AMX1 A2 A
CHARGE CYCLE I/O STATUS 11 11 KEY TOP DECK T
1400H SWITCH +BATT T
8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE K150* J4 J1 J1
CMND & CHARGER RELAY* K149**
1 1 2 +24V
WHEN LINE SENSED CHARGER AMX1 A2 A2
8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR RELAY* LOW VOLTAGE +15V TO
IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK 10 10 LIMITED ENERGY
IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF SEE ILL. 15-1 ALL
EXPECTED VALUE BAT V & X-RAY (LVLE) -15V CKT
ENABLE POWER SUPPLY BDS
CHARGE KEY +5V
CUR SEL SWITCH CONTROL
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF &
BAT V IS LESS THAN 110V. DRIVE CHARGE +24V
CONTROL SCALE POWER-UP
1100H SELECT DELAY
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
BRKR PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK
8 8 2
PWR S2 & S3 ARE
STABLE S2 S3 BRAKE RELEASE
J4 SWITCHES LO-
A BREAKER OPEN* CATED ON COLL
N 5
AMX1 A4 A2 O
D
HANDLES.
R
SEE ILL 15-3 FIL / KVP CONTROL
TRIP BREAKER AMX1 A2
HIGH VOLTAGE DETECT J6 BRKR* TRIP* J4 K1
GENERATION KV>15KV
ABOVE 2 8
DEMAND O
SEE ILL 15-4 R UPPER LOWER TUBE
*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD COLUMN ARM COLUMN PARKED
FILAMENT / mAs DETECT BRAKE
CONTROL 46–288034 BRAKE BRAKE LATCH
>150MA
**K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD -BATT
46–288786
15-19
15-20
ssssss

BATTERY POWER CHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BATT
(NEWER
UNITS) FAN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
ÍÍ
BAT
ÍÍ
T3 +BATT
1 + SCR 1
L2 8A 64A
ÍÍ
110 VAC F55
ÍÍ
3 RECT- F6
IFIER
145 VDC
ÍÍ
BLK BAT
WH
ÍÍ
CORD 5 4
REEL - C + B + + + +
GRN B B R B B B B
ÍÍ
1 A E A A A A
ÍÍ
PHASE RAMP A E
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
ÍÍ
CONTROLLER P +
C
ÍÍ
LINE K-LINE2 O E
CHGR & DRV
ÍÍ
6 6 A BUTTON
1000H
R
I-CHARGE SAFETY
ÍÍ
E
ÍÍ
S
ÍÍ
D0-D7 RTN I-CHARGE GENERATION
DATA BUS U
4 4 M FBK- -
8031
ÍÍ
MICRO- 8
TIMES 0.8 - - -
CONTROLLER B B B
OR I-CHARGE
ÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
AMP A A A
VOLTAGE TIMES 8 FBK+
AMP T T T
-TO- 9 T T T
F5
ÍÍ ÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
CONVERT
CB1
ÍÍ
BAT V & 7.8 kHz J2 BATT
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR
ÍÍ
+BATT ANA-
T1 MUX 5 5 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
ÍÍ
+/- 35% ROTOR
@ 0.5V CONTROL
I-CHRG,
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Í
ON-BOARD AMP BAT SWT +BATT +BATT
CNTRL @X8 (+BATT SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
Í
1280H 9
KEY -
SWITCH +24V B
K62 AMX1 A2
Í
OPERATOR ON A
1 1 2 +24V
CHARGE KEY +5V
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
1100H SELECT DELAY
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
8 8 2
PWR S2 & S3 ARE
J4 SWITCHES LO-
N 5
AMX1 A4 A2 O
D
HANDLES.
R
GENERATION KV>15KV
ABOVE 2 8 *K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD
DEMAND O 46–288034
SEE ILL 15-4 R CHARGE CYCLE **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD UPPER LOWER TUBE
ÍÍÍ
COLUMN ARM COLUMN PARKED
FILAMENT / mAs DETECT NOTE: CROSS–HATCHED PATH ( 46–288786
) REPRESENTS CIRCUITRY TO SUPPLY THE LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED BRAKE
CONTROL BRAKE BRAKE LATCH
>150MA ENERGY POWER SUPPLY FROM THE LINE INSTEAD OF FROM THE BATTERIES DURING THE CHARG-
ING CYCLE. -BATT
15-21
15-22
ssssss

BATTERY POWER DISCHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BATT
(NEWER
UNITS) FAN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
BAT
T3 +BATT
1 + SCR 1
L2 8A 64A
110 VAC F55
3 RECT- F6
IFIER
145 VDC
BLK BAT
CORD WH
5 - 4 C + B + + + +
REEL GRN B B R B B B B
1 A E A A A A
PHASE RAMP A E
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
CONTROLLER P +
C
LINE K-LINE2 O E
CHGR & DRV
6 6 A BUTTON
1000H
R
I-CHARGE E SAFETY
D0-D7 RTN S
U I-CHARGE GENERATION
DATA BUS 4 4 FBK- -
8031 M
MICRO- 8
TIMES 0.8 - - -
CONTROLLER B B B
OR AMP I-CHARGE
TIMES 8 A A A
VOLTAGE FBK+ T T T
-TO- AMP
9 F5 T T T
CONVERT
7.8 kHz CB1
BAT V & J2 BATT
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR ANA-
MUX 5 5 +BATT
T1 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
+/- 35% ROTOR
@ 0.5V CONTROL
I-CHRG,
ON-BOARD AMP BAT SWT +BATT +BATT
CNTRL @X8 (+BATT SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
1280H 9
KEY -
SWITCH +24V B
OPERATOR ON K62 AMX1 A2 A
1 1 2 +24V
CHARGE KEY +5V
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
1100H SELECT DELAY
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
8 8 2
PWR S2 & S3 ARE
J4 SWITCHES LO-
N 5
AMX1 A4 A2 O
D
HANDLES.
R
GENERATION KV>15KV *K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD
ABOVE 2 8 46–288034
DEMAND O **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD
SEE ILL 15-4 R UPPER LOWER TUBE
46–288786 ARM
FILAMENT / mAs DISCHARGE CYCLE (NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION) COLUMN BRAKE COLUMN PARKED
DETECT BRAKE BRAKE LATCH
CONTROL >150MA TURNING KEY SWITCH ON APPLIES BATTERY VOLTAGE TO LOAD!
-BATT
15-23
15-24
APPENDIX Decimal to Hexadecimal

This process works for numbers up to 65535. Compare your number to the columns
DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS labeled DEC in the tables on the right. Write down the largest decimal number, and it's
hexadecimal equivalent, that you can subtract from your number. Perform the subĆ
Introduction traction to get your new number. repeat the process until you obtain zero by subtractĆ
You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents ing a number from the column labeled First Four Bits. The hexadecimal equivalent is
when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the conĆ the sum of the hexadecimal numbers you have written.
versions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when need. This page
will help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are unĆ LEAST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS
able to use your calculator.
Third Four Bits First Four Bits
When using diagnostics you will need to perform four types of conversions: convert DEC HEX DEC HEX msb–7 6 5
from binary to hexadecimal to write a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to binary 4 3 2 1 lsb–0
to read a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to decimal to read a value stored as the
decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number; convert from decimal to hexadecimal to 0000H 0 0H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0
write a value stored as the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number. 0 0
256100H 1 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0
0 1
Binary to Hexadecimal 512200H 2 2H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0
Work with four bits at a time from your eight bit byte, starting with the least significant 1 0
bits, when converting from binary to hexadecimal. Compare the least significant four 768300H 3 3H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0
bits of your eight bit word to the table on the upper right. Write down the hexadecimal 1 1
number from the column titled First Four Bits. Compare the most significant four bits 1024400H 4 4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1
of your eight bit word to the table on the lower right. Write down the hexadecimal 0 0
number from the column titled Second Four Bits to the left of the number for the first 1280500H 5 5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1
four bits. Repeat the process if you need to convert a second eight bit word using the 0 1
Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns. The hexadecimal equivalent is the 1536600H 6 6H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1
number you have written. 1 0
1792700H 7 7H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1
1 1
Hexadecimal to Binary 2048800H 8 8H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convertĆ 0 0
ing from hexadecimal to binary. Compare the least significant digit to the column laĆ 2304900H 9 9H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
beled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the binary number 0 1
from the far right. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second Four Bits in 2560A00H 10 AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
the the table on the lower right. To the left of the first number number, write the binary 1 0
number from the right column. Repeat the process as need to convert a third or fourth 2816B00H 11 BH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find your digit. The 1 1
binary equivalent is the number you have written. 3072C00H 12 CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
0 0
3328D00H 13 DH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
Hexadecimal to Decimal 0 1
Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convertĆ 3584E00H 14 EH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
ing from hexadecimal to decimal. Compare the least significant digit to the column 1 0
labeled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the decimal number 3840F00H 15 FH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
from the column to the left.. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second 1 1
Four Bits in the the table on the lower right. Underneath first number number, write
the decimal number from the left column. Repeat the process as need to convert a
MOST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS
third or fourth digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find
your digit. The decimal equivalent is the sum number you have written. Fourth Four Bits Second Four Bits
DEC HEX DEC HEX msb–7 6 5
4 3 2 1 lsb–0
A-1
00000H 0 00H 0 0 0 0 ....................... 327688000H 128 80H 1 0 0

.......... 0 .......................
40961000H 16 10H 0 0 0 368649000H 144 90H 1 0 0
1 ....................... 1 .......................
81922000H 32 20H 0 0 1 40960A000H 160 A0H 1 0 1
0 ....................... 0 .......................
122883000H 48 30H 0 0 1 45056B000H 176 B0H 1 0 1
1 ....................... 1 .......................
163844000H 64 40H 0 1 0 49152C000H 192 C0H 1 1 0
0 ....................... 0 .......................
204805000H 80 50H 0 1 0 53248D000H 208 D0H 1 1 0
1 ....................... 1 .......................
245766000H 96 60H 0 1 1 57344E000H 224 E0H 1 1 1
0 ....................... 0 .......................
286727000H 112 70H 0 1 1 61440F000H 240 F0H 1 1 1
1 ....................... 1 .......................
A-2
A-3

Amx 4

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Amx 4

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GE Medical Systems

AMX-4 Series Diagnostics

Advanced Service Documentation

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

SECTION TITLE PAGE

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

2 ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

4 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION TITLE PAGE

5 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

6 DATA LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

7 ERROR LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION TITLE PAGE

9 DATA BASE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

10 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION TITLE PAGE

11 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH:

12 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION TITLE PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION TITLE PAGE

14 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–1

15 BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–1

APPENDIX DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

Title Page 11 5-1 thru 5-16 11 11-1 thru 11-22 11

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX–4 Series Diagnostics

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

CPU BOARD 46-232828 CPU BOARD 46-264974

1-2 Diagnostics Identification

Diagnostics are compatible with AMX–4 Model Numbers 46–270157, 46–315161,

CPU BOARD 46-232828 46-264974

PROMS RELATED FMI’S

46–302688G1/46–302687G1 FMI 10271

46–303272G1/46–303273G1 FMI’S 10289 & 10291

END SERVC MODE DIAGNOSIS ITEMS

SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGE BATTERYS

1-3 Diagnostics Menu Items

The Diagnostics Menu has four choices:

1. SYS DIAGNOSTICS Software routines to aid fault isolation.

2. DATA LOG Loading, viewing and initializing of the Data

3. ERROR LOG Viewing and initializing of the error log and

4. CHARGE BATTERYS Charge batteries when the AMX is not fully

SYS BLOCK TEST DISP CNTRL TEST LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST DISP BATRY VOLTS

1-4 Sys Diagnostics